Page 1 DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA70000/B Series Digital Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual *P077001006* 077-0010-06...
Page 3 DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA70000/B Series Digital Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual www.tektronix.com 077-0010-06...
Page 4 Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material.
Page 5: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Preface ......................Getting Started ....................Setting Up Remote Communications..............Command Syntax....................Backus-Naur Form Notation ................Command and Query Structure ................Clearing the Instrument ..................Command Entry....................Constructed Mnemonics ..................Argument Types....................Command Groups ....................2-11 Acquisition Command Group ................2-11 Alias Command Group..................
Page 6 Table of Contents ......................... Queues ......................Event Handling Sequence................... Synchronization Methods ................... Appendix A: Character Set ..................Appendix B: Reserved Words .................. Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values..............Default Setup ....................Appendix D: GPIB Interface Speciﬁcations ..............Interface Messages ..................GPIB Functions .....................
Page 7: Preface
Optional Applications Software for Tektronix Windows-Based Instruments (CD-ROM). This CD-ROM contains trial versions of application-speciﬁc programs that you can install and run ﬁve times per application. To purchase an application, contact your local Tektronix representative. Other Included Documentation. Installation booklets are included in the Product Software and Operating System Restore Software packages.
Page 8 Preface The programmer guide is divided into the following major topics: Getting Started. This topic introduces you to the programming information and provides basic information about setting up your instrument for remote control. Command Groups. This topic contains all the commands listed in functional groups.
Page 9: Getting Started
Getting Started This programmer guide provides you with the information required to use GPIB commands for remotely controlling your instrument. With this information, you can write computer programs that will perform functions such as setting the front panel controls, taking measurements, performing statistical calculations, and exporting data for use in other programs, such as spreadsheets.
Page 10 Getting Started Connecting to the Your instrument has a 24-pin GPIB connector on its rear (side) panel. This connector has a D-type shell and conforms to IEEE Std 488.1¾1987. Attach an Instrument IEEE Std 488.1¾1987 GPIB cable to this connector and to your controller as shown in the following ﬁgure.
Page 11 Getting Started 2. Click the Conﬁguration Talk/Listen button. 3. Change the GPIB Address to a unique address. 4. Click the Close button. The instrument is now set up for bidirectional communication with your controller. DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 12 Getting Started DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 13: Command Syntax
Command Syntax You can control the operations and functions of the instrument through the GPIB interface using commands and queries. The following related topics listed describe the syntax of these commands and queries. The topics also describe the conventions that the instrument uses to process them. See the Command Groups topic in the table of contents for a listing of the commands by command group, or use the index to locate a speciﬁc command.
Page 14 Command Syntax Table 2-2: Command Message Elements Symbol Meaning <Header> This is the basic command name. If the header ends with a question mark, the command is a query. The header may begin with a colon (:) character. If the command is concatenated with other commands, the beginning colon is required.
Page 15: Clearing The Instrument
Command Syntax Queries Queries cause the instrument to return status or setting information. Queries have the structure: [:]<Header>? [:]<Header>?[<Space><Argument> [<Coma><Argument>]...] You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics below the speciﬁed branch or level.
Page 16: Command Entry
Command Syntax Command Entry The following rules apply when entering commands: You can enter commands in upper or lower case. You can precede any command with white space characters. White space characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through 09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).
Page 17 Command Syntax When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow these rules: 1. Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning colon on all commands except the ﬁrst one. For example, the commands , can be concatenated TRIGger:MODe NORMal ACQuire:NUMAVg 10 into the following single command:...
Page 18: Constructed Mnemonics
Command Syntax Here are some invalid concatenations: (no colon before DISplay:PERSistance:RESET;ACQuire:NUMAVg 10 ACQuire) (extra colon before DISplay:GRAticule FULl;:FILTer SINX FILTer; instead) DISplay:GRAticule FULl;FILTer SINX (colon before a star (*) command) DISplay:PERSistance:RESET;:*OPC (levels DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr DEFAULT;COLOr:REFCOLOr INHERIT of the mnemonics are different; either remove the second use of or place COLor in front of...
Page 19: Argument Types
Command Syntax Math Speciﬁer Mnemonics Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header. Table 2-6: Math Speciﬁer Mnemonics Symbol Meaning Math<x> A math waveform speciﬁer; <x> is 1 through 4. Measurement Speciﬁer Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the header.
Page 20 Command Syntax Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting, either by rounding or truncating, when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted in the command description. Quoted String Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string, which is simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote (’) or double quote (").
Page 21 Command Syntax Table 2-12: Block Argument (cont.) Symbol Meaning <DChar> A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF (0 through 255 decimal) <Block> A block of data bytes deﬁned as: <Block> ::= {#<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...] |#0[<DChar>...]<terminator>} <NZDig> speciﬁes the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together, the <NZDig>...
Page 22 Command Syntax 2-10 DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 23: Command Groups
Command Groups The programmable interface conforms to Tektronix standard codes and formats except where noted. The GPIB interface also conforms to IEEE Std 488.2-1987 except where noted. Acquisition Command Group Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up the modes and functions that control how the instrument acquires the signals you input to the channels and processes them into waveforms.
Page 24: Alias Command Group
Alias names do not appear in response messages. The Alias commands are deﬁned in Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats. Deviations between that standard and what is speciﬁed here will be considered errors unless speciﬁcally noted in the command description in this document.
Page 25: Calibration Command Group
Command Groups Table 2-14: Alias Commands (cont.) Command Description ALIas:DEFine Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label ALIas:DELEte Removes a speciﬁed alias ALIas:DELEte:ALL Deletes all existing aliases ALIas:DELEte:NAMe Removes a speciﬁed alias ALIas:STATE Sets or returns the alias state Calibration Command Group The Calibration commands provide information about the current state of instrument calibration and allow you to initiate internal signal path calibration...
Page 26 Command Groups You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions: Off. Shuts off the display of all cursors. Vertical Bars. Displays vertical bar cursors, which provide traditional horizontal unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1), Cursor 2 (bar2), the delta between them, and 1/delta (results in frequency when the horizontal unit is time).
Page 27 Command Groups Command Description CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? Returns the difference between vbar cursors CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> Sets or returns the vbar cursor<x> horizontal position CURSor:VBArs:POS<x> Sets or queries the horizontal position for vertical bar cursors CURSor:VBArs:UNIts Sets or returns the units for vbar cursors CURSor:WAVEform Sets or returns the current settings for waveform cursors...
Page 28: Diagnostics Command Group
Command Groups Diagnostics Command Group The Diagnostic commands control the selection and execution of diagnostic tests. Command Description DIAg:CONTROL:HALT Enables or disables halting on ﬁrst diagnostic failure DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP Enables or disables looping of diagnostics DIAg:FAILURES:CLEAR Sets and returns the clearing of pass/fail information from data structures, not the Event Log, at the start of diagnostic tests DIAg:EXECUTE...
Page 29: Display Control Command Group
Command Groups Command Description DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS Selects one of the available diagnostic subsystems DIAg:SELect:TEST Selects one of the available diagnostic tests DIAg:STATE Sets the instrument operating state DIAg:STOP Terminates the execution of diagnostics TEST Selects and executes an item at any level of the test hierarchy TEST:RESults? Returns a brief pass or fail status of the last...
Page 30 Command Groups NOTE. The mode you choose globally affects all displayed waveforms. Command Description Returns current display settings DISplay? DISplay:CLOCk Sets or returns the display of the date/time stamp Returns color group settings DISplay:COLOr? DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr Sets or returns the color to be used for math traces DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView Sets or returns the color palette for imageview...
Page 31: E-Mail Command Group
Command Groups Command Description DISplay:PERSistence:RESET Clears the persistence data DISplay:SCREENTExt? Returns all screen text settings DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>? Sets or returns the screen text setting for a given label DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>: Sets or queries the screen text label font color FONTCOlor DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>: Sets or queries the screen text label font FONTNAme name for a given label DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:FONTSIze...
Page 32 Command Groups When an event occurs, the instrument will send an SMTP mail message to one or more designated recipients through the speciﬁed mail server. The message can include any of the following: Screen image Waveform data Measurement data at the time of the event NOTE.
Page 33: File System Command Group
Command Groups Command Description EMail:SMTPServer Sets or queries the address of the SMTP mail server EMail:STATUS? Queries the status of e-mail EMail:TIMEOut Sets or queries the global timeout in seconds EMail:TO Sets or queries the address of the recipient(s) of an e-mail. Multiple addresses are separated with a semicolon (;) EMail:TRIGger Sets or queries whether e-mail is sent when...
Page 34: Hard Copy Command Group
Command Groups Command Description FILESystem? Returns the ﬁle system state FILESystem:COPy Copies one or more ﬁles to a new ﬁle FILESystem:CWD Sets or returns the current working directory for FILESystem GPIB commands FILESystem:DELEte Deletes a named ﬁle or directory FILESystem:DIR? Returns a list of directory contents Makes a new directory FILESystem:MKDir...
Page 35: Histogram Command Group
Command Groups Command Description HARDCopy:READOuts Sets or returns the position of the readouts for hardcopy HARDCopy:VIEW Sets or returns the area of the screen to be hardcopied Histogram Command Group Histogram commands let you select the type of histogram, what part of the waveform should go into the histogram, and histogram statistics.
Page 36: Horizontal Command Group
Get the screen resolution, time of ﬁrst point and time of last point, or get all the horizontal settings Enable or disable the display of the time base You may substitute SECdiv for SCAle in the horizontal commands. This provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments. Description Command HORizontal?
Page 37 Command Groups Command Description HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme Sets or returns the FastFrame reference frame number HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce Sets or returns the FastFrame Reference waveform source HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:CH<x> Sets or returns the FastFrame selected frame number on the speciﬁed waveform HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED: Sets or returns the FastFrame selected MATH<x>...
Page 38 Command Groups Command Description HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:FRAme: Returns the time from the trigger to the CH<x>? start of the speciﬁed frame on the speciﬁed channel HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:FRAme: Returns the time from the trigger to the REF<x>? start of the speciﬁed frame on the speciﬁed reference HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:REF? Sets or returns the time from the trigger to the...
Page 39: Limit Test Command Group
Command Groups Limit Test Command Group Use the commands in the Limit Test Command Group to perform limit testing by selecting channel, math, or reference waveforms and comparing them against a template waveform. Command Description LIMit? Returns all settings for the Limit commands LIMit:BEEP Causes the instrument to beep when the waveform data exceeds the limits set in the...
Page 40: Low Speed Serial Trigger Command Group
Command Groups Command Description LIMit:SRQ Sets or queries whether a Service Request Interrupt (SRQ) is generated when the waveform data falls outside of the test limits LIMit:STATE Sets limit testing on or off or queries whether limit testing is in effect LIMit:STATus? Queries the state of limit testing LIMit:STOPOnviolation...
Page 41 Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:A:CAN:IDENTiﬁer:MODe Sets or queries the CAN trigger identiﬁer mode TRIGger:A:CAN:IDENTiﬁer:VALue Sets or queries the binary address string used for the CAN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA TRIGger:A:CAN:PROBE Sets or queries the probing method used to probe the CAN signal TRIGger:A:CAN:SPEed Sets or queries the bit rate of the CAN...
Page 42 Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:A:RS232:FORMat Sets or queries the display format for the RS232 data value TRIGger:A:RS232:PARity Sets or queries the state of the RS232 parity TRIGger:A:SERIAL:BITRate Sets or queries the clock/data bit rate TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:LEVel Sets or queries the serial trigger clock level TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:POLarity Sets or queries the serial clock polarity TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:SOUrce...
Page 43: Mask Command Group
Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:A:SPI:DATa:MOSI:SOUrce Sets or queries the MOSI data source for the SPI trigger TRIGger:A:SPI:DATa:MOSI:VALue Sets or queries the binary data string used for the SPI trigger if the trigger condition is set to MOSI or MISOMOSI TRIGger:A:SPI:DATa:STARt Sets or queries the nth data byte on the data source after the signal on the enable slave source switches to the polarity speciﬁed by...
Page 44 Command Groups You use the commands in the Mask Command Group to do the following: Specify the waveform source to test and the mask to use. Specify whether to use, and the size of, mask margins, which allow you to shrink or expand an existing set of polygons by a speciﬁed percentage.
Page 45 Command Groups Command Description MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj Sets autoset not to enforce the rule that, for pulse standards, requires 0 V to be in a certain place in the mask. Instead, autoset will attempt to measure the DC offset in the signal and use scope offset or position controls to compensate for the DC offset in the signal MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard...
Page 46 Command Groups Command Description MASK:FILTer Sets or returns whether the selected optical reference receiver mask ﬁlter is enabled MASK:HIGHLIGHTHits Sets or returns whether the hits in a mask are highlighted in different colors than other waveform data MASK:INVert Controls whether the mask is drawn inverted MASK:LOCk Sets or returns the mask lock to waveform mode...
Page 47 Command Groups Command Description MASK:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? Returns the number of points that make up the speciﬁed mask segment of the Current mask MASK:SEG<m>:POINTS Sets or returns the X-Y user coordinates of all points in the Current mask segment MASK:SOUrce Sets or reports which source will be compared against the mask(s) when counting is turned on Deletes the existing mask and sets the...
Page 48 Command Groups Command Description MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure Sets or returns the SRQ status on pass/fail test failure mode MASK:TESt:STATE Sets or returns the state of mask pass/fail testing MASK:TESt:STATUS? Returns the pass/fail test status MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure Sets or returns the stop status on pass/fail test failure mode MASK:TESt:THReshold Sets or returns the number of failed tested...
Page 49: Math Command Group
Command Groups Command Description MASK:USER:VPOS Sets or returns the nominal vertical position, in divisions, used to vertically position the input channels MASK:USER:VSCAle Sets or returns the nominal vertical scale, in volts per division, used to vertically scale the input channels MASK:USER:WIDth Sets or returns the nominal bit width in seconds...
Page 50 Command Groups Command Description MATH<x>:FILTer:RISetime Sets or returns the ﬁlter rise time parameter MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe Sets or returns the label string used for annotating the displayed math waveform MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS Sets or returns the X screen offset where the math waveform label is displayed MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or returns the Y screen offset where the math waveform label is displayed...
Page 51: Measurement Command Group
Command Groups Command Description MATH<x>:UNITString Sets or returns the units used for the math waveform; command overrides the default unit string MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition Sets or returns the speciﬁed math waveform vertical position MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle Sets or returns the speciﬁed math waveform vertical scale (per div) MATHArbﬂt<x>:FILepath Sets the ﬁle path for a ﬁle of ﬁlter coefﬁcients and reads the ﬁle...
Page 52 Command Groups Command Description MEASUrement:ANNOTation:NUMY? Returns the number of vertical measurement annotations being displayed MEASUrement:ANNOTation:STATE Sets or returns the state of visible measurement annotations MEASUrement:ANNOTation:TYPe Sets or returns the type of annotations being used MEASUrement:ANNOTation:X<x>? Returns the value of the speciﬁed annotation MEASUrement:ANNOTation:Y<x>? Returns the value of the speciﬁed annotation MEASUrement:GATing...
Page 53 Command Groups Command Description MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x> Sets or returns the source to measure “to” or “from” for phase or delay immediate measurements MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:SIGType Sets or returns the type of input signal used for the speciﬁed measurement source MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe Sets or returns the type of the immediate measurement MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? Returns the units of the immediate...
Page 54 Command Groups Command Description MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel: Sets or returns the low level for rise time PERCent:LOW (10% level) MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel: Sets or returns the mid1 or mid2 level for PERCent:MID<x> delay measurements MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x> Sets or returns the source to measure “from” or “to” for phase or delay measurements MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>: Sets or returns the type of input signal used SIGType...
Page 55: Miscellaneous Command Group
Command Groups Command Description MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe Turns measurement statistics on or off and sets or returns which pair of statistical accumulations is displayed MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting Sets or returns the ’time constant’ for mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations Miscellaneous Command Group Miscellaneous commands do not ﬁt into other categories. Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2-1987 devices on the GPIB bus.
Page 56: Save And Recall Command Group
Command Groups Command Description NEWpass Changes the password for user protected data PASSWord Provides access for changing user protected data Speciﬁes a comment, which is ignored by the instrument ROSc:SOUrce Sets or queries the selected source for the time base reference oscillator ROSc:STATE? Returns whether the time base reference oscillator is locked...
Page 57: Search And Mark Command Group
Command Groups Command Description FACtory Resets the instrument to factory default settings RECAll:SETUp Recalls saved instrument settings RECAll:SETUp:DESKew Sets or queries the deskew values that are affected by a default setup or a recalled setup RECAll:WAVEform Recalls a stored waveform to a reference location SAVe:SETUp Saves the current front panel setup to a...
Page 58 Command Groups Command Description MARK:SELected:STATe Returns the on or off state of the selected mark. The selected mark is at or near the center of the display MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition? Returns the position of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the zoom overview window MARK:SELected:ZOOm:SCAle? Returns the scale of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the zoom overview window...
Page 59 Command Groups Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the value of the strobe LOW DDRMemory:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW reference level SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the value of the strobe MID DDRMemory:REFLevel:STROBE:MID reference level SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the DDR standard type for a DDRMemory:STANdard DDR Memory analysis search SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:...
Page 60 Command Groups Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel: Sets or returns the math waveform level for MATH<x> an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or math waveform number SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel: Sets or returns the speciﬁed reference REF<x>...
Page 61 Command Groups Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PATtern: Sets or queries the time the pattern trigger WHEn:MORELimit more limit test uses to determines where to place a mark. is the search number <x> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULse: Sets or returns the source waveform for a SOUrce pulse trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 62 Command Groups Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets or returns the reference waveform THReshold:LOW:REF<x> threshold LOW level for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or the reference waveform number SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: Sets or returns the condition setting for a WHEn runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 63 Command Groups Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or returns the hold time setting for a HOLDTime setup/hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: Sets or returns the setup time setting for a SETTime setup/hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 64 Command Groups Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or returns the polarity setting for a TRANsition:POLarity:REF<x> transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or reference waveform number SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or returns the threshold high voltage TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH:CH<x>...
Page 65 Command Groups Command Description SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WIDth: Sets or returns the polarity for a width search POLarity:CH<x> to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or channel number SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WIDth: Sets or returns the polarity for a width search POLarity:MATH<x>...
Page 66: Status And Error Command Group
Command Groups Command Description SEARCH:STOP Sets or queries the stop of acquisitions when a search ﬁnds an event SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the termination logic margin DDRMemory:MARgin for back-to-back writes SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A: Sets or queries the maximum distance, in DDRMemory:MAXCas clock periods, to the left of the start of the mark where the instrument looks for the chip-select pulse SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:...
Page 67: Teklink Command Group
Command Groups Command Description *WAI Prevents the instrument from executing further commands until all pending operations ﬁnish ALLEv? Returns all events and their messages Returns instrument status BUSY? DESE Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register EVENT? Returns event code from the event queue EVMsg?
Page 68: Trigger Command Group
Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:MULTiscope:DELay? Returns the delay time for trigger out of the TekLink trigger out line TRIGger:MULTiscope:LOGic Sets or queries the role of the instrument in the MultiScope trigger network TRIGger:MULTiscope:OPTion Sets or returns the trigger type for the TekLink trigger TRIGger:MULTiscope:ROLe Sets or returns the role of the instrument...
Page 69 Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe:CH<x> Sets or returns the slope for the edge trigger for the channel TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the edge trigger TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel Sets or returns the level for the trigger TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel:CH<x> Sets or returns the level for the trigger for the channel TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE? bbvannReturns the source, coupling and...
Page 70 Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa: Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for THReshold setup and hold trigger TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa: Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for THReshold:CH<x> setup and hold trigger for the channel Returns the voltage threshold and data TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa? source for the setup/hold trigger TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime...
Page 71 Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:POLarity: Sets or returns the polarity for the A or B CH<x> pulse runt trigger for the channel TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:QUAlify Sets or returns the polarity for the A or B pulse runt trigger TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold: Sets the upper and lower switching thresholds BOTh for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:...
Page 72 Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition: Returns the upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger THReshold? TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn Sets or queries whether to check for a transitioning signal that is faster or slower than the speciﬁed delta time for the transition time trigger TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition? Returns the delta time, polarity, and both...
Page 73 Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:A:COMMunication: Sets the communication threshold high level {AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS}:THReshold: HIGH TRIGger:A:COMMunication: Sets the communication threshold low level {AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS}:THReshold: TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate Sets or returns the communication bit rate TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk: Sets or returns the polarity of the clock signal POLarity Selects the CMI pulse form TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI: PULSEForm...
Page 74 Command Groups Command Description TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN Sets or returns the video scan rate TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce Sets or returns the video trigger source TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard Sets or returns the video standard TRIGger:A:VIDeo? Returns the video parameters for the A trigger TRIGger:AUXLevel Sets or returns the level for the auxiliary trigger TRIGger:B Sets the B trigger level to 50% or returns the...
Page 75: Vertical Command Group
(channel) waveforms for acquisition and to control the display of channel, reference, and math waveforms. You may replace VOLts with SCAle in the vertical commands. This provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments. Command Description AUXIn:BANdwidth Sets or returns the selectable low-pass bandwidth limit ﬁlter of the AUX In input...
Page 76 Command Groups Command Description AUXIn:PRObe:RESistance? Returns the resistance factor of the probe that is attached to the AUX In input AUXIn:PRObe:SET Sets or queries aspects of probe accessory user interfaces, for example probe attenuation factors AUXIn:PRObe:SIGnal Sets or queries aspects of probe accessory user interfaces AUXIn:PRObe:TIPtype Sets or returns the type of probe tip being...
Page 77 Command Groups Command Description CH<x>:LABel:YPOS Sets or returns the Y display coordinate for the channel waveform label CH<x>:OFFSet Sets or returns the channel offset CH<x>:POSition Sets or returns the channel vertical position CH<x>:PRObe? Returns the gain, resistance, units, and ID of the probe that is attached to the speciﬁed channel Autozeros the probe attached to the speciﬁed...
Page 78 Command Groups Command Description CH<x>:PRObe:SET Sets or queries aspects of probe accessory user interfaces, for example probe attenuation factors CH<x>:PRObe:SIGnal Sets or queries aspects of probe accessory user interfaces CH<x>:PRObe:TIPtype Sets or returns the type of probe tip being used on the speciﬁed channel CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts? Returns the units of the probe that is attached to the speciﬁed channel...
Page 79: Waveform Transfer Command Group
Command Groups Command Description SELect:<wfm> Turns on the speciﬁed waveform Or returns whether the speciﬁed channel is on or off SELect:CH<x> Sets or queries the displayed state of the speciﬁed channel waveform SELect:CONTROl Sets or returns the waveform controlled by the front panel Waveform Transfer Command Group Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to transfer...
Page 80 Command Groups The deﬁned binary formats specify the order in which the bytes are transferred. The following are the four binary formats: RIBinary speciﬁes signed integer data-point representation with the most signiﬁcant byte transferred ﬁrst. SRIBinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped, meaning that the least signiﬁcant byte is transferred ﬁrst.
Page 81 Command Groups Transferring Waveform Data from the Instrument. You can transfer waveforms from the instrument to an external controller using the following sequence: 1. Select the waveform source(s) using DATa:SOUrce. 2. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg. 3. Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr. NOTE.
Page 82 Command Groups Command Description CURVENext? Returns unique waveform data from a new acquisition CURVEStream Transfers continuously the waveform data from the instrument as it is acquired DATa Sets the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe Command Or returns the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the...
Page 83 Command Groups Command Description WFMInpre:NR_Pt Sets or returns the number of points in the transmitted waveform record WFMInpre:PT_Fmt Sets or returns the point format of incoming waveform data WFMInpre:PT_Off Sets or returns the trigger point within the incoming waveform data WFMInpre:WFId Allows a waveform extracted from the instrument to be more easily sent back...
Page 84: Zoom Command Group
Command Groups Command Description WFMOutpre:PT_Off? Returns the trigger point relative to DATA:START for the waveform WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? Returns whether the source waveform is WFMOutpre:WFId? Returns a string describing the acquisition parameters for the waveform Returns the horizontal sampling interval WFMOutpre:XINcr? WFMOutpre:XUNit? Returns the horizontal units for the waveform WFMOutpre:XZEro? Returns the (sub-sample) time between the...
Page 85 Command Groups Command Description ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle Sets or queries the zoom horizontal scale factor around which the zoom waveform is displayed ZOOm:MATH<x>:HORizontal:POSition Sets or queries the horizontal position of the speciﬁed math waveform ZOOm:MATH<x>:HORizontal:SCAle Sets or queries the zoom horizontal scale factor of the speciﬁed math waveform ZOOm:MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition Sets or queries the vertical position of the...
Page 86 Command Groups Command Description ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal: Sets or queries the zoom horizontal position TIMEPosition of the speciﬁed waveform for the speciﬁed zoom in time ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical: Sets or returns the vertical zoom position for POSition the speciﬁed waveform in the speciﬁed zoom ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle Sets or returns the vertical zoom scale for the speciﬁed waveform in the speciﬁed zoom...
Page 87: Commands Listed In Alphabetical Order
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the following current acquisition parameters: Stop after Acquisition state Mode Number of envelopes Number of averages Number of samples Sampling mode Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire? Related Commands ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:NUMFRAMESACQuired?, ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:NUMEnv, ACQuire:STOPAfter Examples...
Page 88 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order turns off the eight bit interpolation mode. Trial Examples sets the interpolation sampling mode ON. ACQUIRE:INTERPEIGHTBIT ON might return ACQUIRE:INTERPEIGHTBIT? :ACQUIRE:INTERPEIGHTBIT indicating the interpolation sampling mode is set to AUTO. AUTO ACQuire:MODe This command sets or queries the acquisition mode of the instrument. This affects all live waveforms.
Page 89 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order number of samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of data values that compose the average. speciﬁes averaging mode, in which the resulting waveform shows an AVErage average of data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The SAMple instrument processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired waveform, creating a running exponential average of the input signal.
Page 90 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax ACQuire:NUMACq? Related Commands ACQuire:STATE Examples might return , indicating that 350 ACQUIRE:NUMACQ? :ACQUIRE:NUMACQ 350 acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire:STATE RUN command. ACQuire:NUMAVg This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform.
Page 91 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Sending INFInite as an argument sets 2e9 envelopes. The query response will be 2e9 not INFInite. Group Acquisition Syntax ACQuire:NUMEnv {<NR1>|INFInite} ACQuire:NUMEnv? Arguments is the number of waveform acquisitions to be enveloped. INFInite Examples speciﬁes that an enveloped waveform will show the result ACQUIRE:NUMENV 10 of combining 10 separately acquired waveforms.
Page 92 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire:NUMSAMples This command sets or queries the minimum number of acquired samples that make up a waveform database (WfmDB) waveform for single sequence mode and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test. This is equivalent to setting the Waveform Database Samples in the Acquisition Mode side menu.
Page 93 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the sampling mode to equivalent time allowed (ON in REPET). The number of channels selected and the sampling speed affects the mode that the instrument uses to acquire data. At slow sampling speeds the instrument uses real time sampling.
Page 94 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order =0 stops acquisitions; any other value starts acquisitions. Examples starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count ACQUIRE:STATE RUN of the number of acquisitions. might return , indicating that the ACQUIRE:STATE? :ACQUIRE:STATE 0 acquisition is stopped.
Page 95 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands ALIas:STATE Arguments turns Alias expansion off. If a deﬁned alias is sent when ALIas:STATE is off, a command error (102) will be generated. turns Alias expansion on. When a deﬁned alias is received, the speciﬁed command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
Page 96 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax ALIas:DEFine <QString><,>{<QString>|<Block>} ALIas:DEFine? Related Commands ALIas:STATE Arguments The ﬁrst is the alias label. <QString> This label cannot be a command name. Labels must start with a letter and can contain only letters, numbers, and underscores; other characters are not allowed. The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters.
Page 97 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ALIas:DELEte:ALL (No Query Form) This command deletes all existing aliases. Group Alias Syntax ALIas:DELEte:ALL Related Commands ALIas:DELEte, ALIas:DELEte:NAMe Examples deletes all existing aliases. ALIAS:DELETE:ALL ALIas:DELEte:NAMe (No Query Form) This command removes a speciﬁed alias. An error message is generated if the named alias does not exist.
Page 98 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments turns alias expansion off. If a deﬁned alias is sent when ALIas:STATE , the instrument generates a command error (102). turns alias expansion on. When a deﬁned alias is received, the speciﬁed command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed. =0 turns off aliases;...
Page 99 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return 5000 if a 5000 point waveform was ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF3? active in the reference 3 slot. AUTOSet (No Query Form) This command (no query format) sets the vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls of the instrument to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform. (To autoset a video waveform, the video trigger must be set to video standard, not custom.
Page 100 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax AUXIn:BANdwidth <NR3> AUXIn:BANdwidth? Arguments is one of the supported bandwidths on the attached probe. <NR3> Examples sets the bandwidth of AUX In input to AUXIN:BANDWIDTH 10.0000E+9 10 GHz. , for DPO7054 instruments, might return AUXIN:BANDWIDTH? , indicating that there is no bandwidth :AUXIN:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+06...
Page 101 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order offset value. The channel reference marker will move to the vertical graticule position given by the negative of the offset value divided by the scale factor, unless that position is off-screen. If the computed coordinate for the reference mark is off-screen, the mark moves to the nearest screen limit and changes from a right-pointing arrow ( →) to an arrow pointing in the appropriate off-screen direction.
Page 102 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax AUXIn:PRObe:DEGAUSS EXECute Arguments starts a probe degauss cycle. EXECUTE Examples , degausses the probe attached to the AUX AUXIN:PROBE:DEGAUSS EXECUTE In input. AUXIn:PRObe:DEGAUSS:STATE? (Query Only) This command queries whether the probe attached to the AUX In input has been degaussed.
Page 103 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXIn:PRObe:GAIN? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to the AUX In input. The “gain” of a probe is the output divided by the input transfer ratio. For example, a common 10x probe has a gain of 0.1. Group Vertical Syntax...
Page 104 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXIn:PRObe:INPUTMode This command sets or returns one of the probe’s four input modes on the AUX In input. Group Vertical Syntax AUXIn:PRObe:INPUTMode {makeEnumList(signalPathMgr_probeTipMode} AUXIn:PRObe:INPUTMode? Arguments sets the probe to the default mode. DEFault sets the probe to route differential signals to the host. DIFFerential sets the probe to route common-mode signals to the host.
Page 105 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ? might return AUXIN:PROBE:INPUTMODE:AOFFSET :AUXIN:PROBE: , indicating that the A mode offset control is INPUTMODE:AOFFSET 0.0000 set to 0 V. AUXIn:PRObe:INPUTMode:BOFFSet This command sets or returns the requested B mode offset control of the probe that is attached to the AUX In input.
Page 106 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ? might return AUXIN:PROBE:INPUTMODE:CMOFFSET :AUXIN:PROBE: , indicating that the common mode offset INPUTMODE:CMOFFSET? “0.0000” control is set to 0 V. AUXIn:PRObe:INPUTMode:DMOFFSet This command sets or returns the requested differential mode offset control of the probe that is attached to the AUX In input. Group Vertical Syntax...
Page 107 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the probe attenuation to 10X. AUXIN:PROBE:RANGE ATTEN10X ? might return AUXIN:PROBE:RANGE :AUXIN:PROBE:RANGE ATTEN1_25X indicating that the probe attenuation is set to 25X. AUXIn:PRObe:RESistance? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the resistance factor of the probe that is attached to the AUX In input.
Page 108 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the P7260 probe to ±3 V dynamic range with 6 GHz ATTENUATION 25X bandwidth and 25X attenuation. sets the P7380SMA probe voltage termination source to VTERMsource AUTO auto. sets the P7380SMA probe voltage termination source VTERMsource INTernal to internal.
Page 109 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXIn:PRObe:TIPtype This command sets or queries the type of probe tip being used. Group Vertical Syntax AUXIn:PRObe:TIPtype {HBWStraightflex|OTHer} AUXIn:PRObe:TIPtype? Arguments lets the instrument know you are using a high bandwidth HBWStraightflex straight-ﬂex probe tip. lets the instrument know you are not using a high bandwidth straight-ﬂex OTHer probe tip.
Page 110 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order return the following values (assuming that a 1x probe is presently attached, since the external attenuation is used in combination with the probe attenuation): AUXIN:PROBE:EXTA? 20.00E+0 AUXIN:PROBE? 1.0E+0 This command is equivalent to selecting Attenuation from the Vertical menu, and then either viewing or setting Ext Atten.
Page 111 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands AUXIn:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten Arguments is the attenuation value, which is speciﬁed in the range from -200.00 dB <NR3> to 200.00 dB. Examples sets the attenuation value on the AUX AUXIN:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEN 2.5 IN input to 2.5 dB . might return AUXIN:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEN? , indicating that the...
Page 112 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXout? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the auxiliary output setup and is equivalent to selecting External Signals. From the Utilities menu, and then viewing the current settings for the AUX OUT Conﬁguration. Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUXout? Related Commands...
Page 113 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUXout:SOUrce {ATRIGger|BTRIGger|MAIn|DELayed|EVENT|REFOut} AUXout:SOUrce? Related Commands AUXout? Arguments sets the source at the BNC connector to the main trigger. ATRIGger sets the source at the BNC connector to the delayed trigger. BTRIGger sets the source at the BNC connector to the main trigger. MAIn sets the source at the BNC connector to the delayed trigger.
Page 114 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax BUSY? Related Commands *OPC, *WAI Returns =0 means that the instrument is not busy processing a command whose <NR1> execution time is extensive. =1 means that the instrument is busy processing a command Commands <NR1>...
Page 115 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CALibrate? Examples might return CALIBRATE? :CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS PASS;CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STATUS PASS0;:CALIBRATE:RESULTS:SPC , indicating PASS;:CALIBRATE:PROBESTATE:CH1 1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1 the calibration status. CALibrate:CALProbe:CH<x>? (Query Only) This query-only command instructs the instrument to perform a probe calibration for the selected channel and returns the calibration status. The Channel <x> range is 1 through 4.
Page 116 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CALibrate:INTERNal (No Query Form) This command (no query form) starts the internal signal path calibration (SPC) of the instrument. You can use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return the current status of the internal signal path calibration of the instrument. Group Calibration Syntax...
Page 117 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? Related Commands *CAL? Returns This query will return one of the following: indicates the instrument has not had internal signal path calibration run. INIT indicates the instrument has not warmed up for the required time WARMUP to perform signal path calibration.
Page 118 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return :CALIBRATE:PROBESTATE:CH1? , indicating that the probe calibration for :CALIBRATE:PROBESTATE:CH1 0 Channel 1 passed. CALibrate:RESults? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the status of internal and factory calibrations, without performing any calibration operations. The results returned do not include the calibration status of attached probes.
Page 119 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples returns the results of the last SPC operation: either CALIBRATE:RESULTS:SPC? PASS, FAIL, WARMUP, TEMPDRIFT, INIT, or RUNNING. CH<x>? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the vertical parameters for the speciﬁed channel. The channel is speciﬁed by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4.
Page 120 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the upper bandwidth limit to 150 MHz. ONEfifty sets the upper bandwidth limit to 500 MHz. FIVe disables any optional bandwidth limiting. The speciﬁed channel operates at FULl its maximum bandwidth. argument is a double-precision ASCII string. The instrument <NR3>...
Page 121 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH<x>:BANdwidth:ENHanced:APPLYtoall This command sets or queries speciﬁed channel’s bandwidth and bandwidth enhanced selection, “DSP” or “Analog Only” to set the other channels the same. Bandwidth achieved on each channel may further be limited while conditions, such as a lower bandwidth probe, that limited the bandwidth exist.
Page 122 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order constant sample rate, keeping the system in the sample rate base. This is also known as Bandwidth Enhanced AUTO. NOTE. The bandwidth set is inﬂuenced by the requested bandwidth and its channel limitations. NOTE. If Force is ON, a request to lower the sample rate below the DSP supported rate is rejected.
Page 123 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH<x>:COUPling This command sets or queries the input attenuator coupling setting for the speciﬁed channel. The channel is speciﬁed by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4. This command is equivalent to selecting Coupling from the Vertical menu. NOTE.
Page 124 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH<x>:DESKew <NR3> CH<x>:DESKew? Arguments is the deskew time for this channel, ranging from -25 ns to +25 ns with a <NR3> resolution of 1 ps. Out-of-range values are clipped. Examples sets the deskew time for Channel 4 to 5 ns. CH4:DESKEW 5.0E-9 might return , indicating that the...
Page 125 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR1> CH<x>:LABel:XPOS? Arguments is the location (control in divisions) where the waveform label for the <NR1> selected channel is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0 through 10. Examples moves the waveform label for the Channel 3 that it begins 5 CH3:LABEL:XPOS 5...
Page 126 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command offsets the vertical acquisition window (moves the level at the vertical center of the acquisition window) for the selected channel. Visualize offset as scrolling the acquisition window towards the top of a large signal for increased offset values, and scrolling towards the bottom for decreased offset values.
Page 127 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order and the offset is set to 3.0, then input signals equal to 3.0 units are displayed 2.0 divisions above the center of the screen. Group Vertical Syntax CH<x>:POSition <NR3> CH<x>:POSition? Related Commands CH<x>:OFFSet, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition, MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition Arguments is the position value, in divisions from the center graticule, ranging from <NR3>...
Page 128 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero (No Query Form) This command sets the probe attached to the input to autozero. The channel is speciﬁed by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4. Group Vertical Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:AUTOZero EXECute Arguments sets the probe attached to the speciﬁed channel to autozero.
Page 129 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return CH2:PROBE:DEGAUSS:STATE? :CH2:PROBE:DEGAUSS:STATE , indicating that the probe attached to the Channel 2 has been degaussed. PASSED CH<x>:PRObe:FORCEDRange This command sets the attached probe to the speciﬁed range, or it queries the range of the probe attached to the speciﬁed channel. The channel is speciﬁed by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4.
Page 130 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH<x>:PRObe:ID? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the type and serial of the probe that is attached to the speciﬁed channel. The channel is speciﬁed by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4. Group Vertical Syntax...
Page 131 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe? Examples might return CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE? :CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE "P6203" indicating that P6203-type probe is attached to Channel 1. CH<x>:PRObe:INPUTMode This command sets or queries the input mode of the probe that is attached to the speciﬁed channel. Group Vertical Syntax...
Page 132 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the A mode offset control. Examples sets the requested A mode offset CH1:PROBE:INPUTMODE:AOFFSET 5.0 control of the probe that is attached to the Channel 1 to its 5 Ampere range. might return CH1:PROBE:INPUTMODE:AOFFSET? , indicating that the requested A :CH1:PROBE:INPUTMODE:AOFFSET? 0.0000 mode offset control of the probe that is attached to the Channel 1 is set to 0.0.
Page 133 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the requested common mode CH1:PROBE:INPUTMODE:CMOFFSET 5.0 offset control of the probe that is attached to the Channel 1 to its 5 Ampere range. might return CH1:PROBE:INPUTMODE:CMOFFSET? , indicating that the requested :CH1:PROBE:INPUTMODE:CMOFFSET 0.0000 common mode offset control of the probe that is attached to the Channel 1 is set to 0.0.
Page 134 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ATTEN75X|ATTEN80X|ATTEN85X|ATTEN90X|ATTEN95X| ATTEN100X|ATTEN125X|ATTEN150X|ATTEN175X|ATTEN200X| ATTEN250X|ATTEN300X|ATTEN350X|ATTEN400X|ATTEN450X| ATTEN500X|ATTEN550X|ATTEN600X|ATTEN650X|ATTEN700X| ATTEN750X|ATTEN800X|ATTEN850X|ATTEN900X|ATTEN950X| ATTEN1000X} CH<x>:PRObe:RANge? Examples sets the attenuation range of the probe attached CH1:PROBE:RANGE ATTEN10X to Channel 1 to 10X. might return CH1:PROBE:RANGE? :CH1:PROBE:RANGE ATTEN1_25X indicating that the attenuation range of the probe on the designated Channel 1 is set to 25X.
Page 135 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:SET {<QString>} CH<x>:PRObe:SET? Arguments is a quoted string representing a settable aspect of the attached QString accessory. Example strings for some probes are shown as follows: sets the P7260 probe to ±0.75 V dynamic range with 6 GHz ATTENuation 5X bandwidth and 5X attenuation.
Page 136 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments opens a relay passing your signal to the instrument. PASS closes a relay preventing your signal from reaching the instrument. BYPass During probe degauss, the signal should be bypassed. Examples opens a relay passing your signal on Channel 2 to CH2:PROBE:SIGNAL PASS the instrument.
Page 137 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts? Related Commands CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits Examples might return , indicating that the CH4:PROBE:UNITS? :CH4:PROBE:UNITS "V" units of measure for the probe attached to Channel 4 are volts. CH<x>:PROBECal? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the probe calibration state for the selected channel.
Page 138 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the values. The probe range is automatically calculated. AUTO allows you to select various valid values for the probe connected to a MANual particular channel. Examples sets the values and the probe range is automatically CH2:PROBECONTROL AUTO calculated.
Page 139 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes an external attenuation, CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 167.00E-3 which is connected between the user’s input signal and the input of the probe attached to Channel 1. might return CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN? :CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN , indicating that the probe attached to Channel 2 is connected 1.0000E+00 directly to the user’s signal.
Page 140 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order the factory default string value of “None”, they become the attenuated units of measurement for that channel. It is assumed that the probe connected to the speciﬁed channel is of the correct type to receive the output of the user’s external transducer or network.
Page 141 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax CH<x>:SCAle <NR3> CH<x>:SCAle? Related Commands CH<x>:OFFSet, CH<x>:POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle, MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle Arguments is the vertical channel scale in units per division. <NR3> Examples sets the Channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division. CH4:SCALE 100E-03 might return , indicating that the CH2:SCALE?
Page 142 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order *CLS (No Query Form) This command (no query form) clears the following: Event Queue Standard Event Status Register Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit) If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared.
Page 143 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments turns command batching off. turns command batching on. = 0 turns command batching off; any other value turns command batching <NR1> Examples disables command batching. CMDBATCH OFF might return , indicating that command batching is CMDBATCH? :CMDBATCH 1 turned on.
Page 144 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURSor:FUNCtion {OFF|HBArs|VBArs|SCREEN|WAVEform} CURSor:FUNCtion? Related Commands CURSor:STATE Arguments removes the cursors from the display but does not change the cursor type. speciﬁes horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units. HBArs speciﬁes vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units. VBArs speciﬁes both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which measure in SCREEN...
Page 145 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? Related Commands CURSor:HBArs:UNIts? Returns A ﬂoating point value with an exponent. Examples might return CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA? :CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 5.0800E+00 indicating that the voltage difference between the two cursors is 5.08 V. CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> This command sets or queries the horizontal bar cursor position relative to ground, which is expressed in vertical units (usually volts).
Page 146 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This query always returns BASE, indicating that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are those of the base waveform to which they were assigned. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:HBArs:UNIts? Examples always returns CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS? :CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE indicating that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are base.
Page 147 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURSor:MODe {TRACk|INDependent} CURSor:MODe? Arguments ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together. For cursor 1 TRACk adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors together; however, cursor 2 continues to move independently of cursor 1. allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.
Page 148 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURSor:SCREEN:XPOSITION<x> CURSor:SCREEN:XPOSITION<x>? CURSor:SCREEN:YPOSITION<x> This command sets or queries the y position of the speciﬁed screen cursor. The cursor is speciﬁed by x, which can be 1 or 2. If the cursor is not speciﬁed, it defaults to cursor 1.
Page 149 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the Cursor1 source to Channel 2. CURSOR:SOURCE 1 CH2 might return indicating that the CURSOR:SOURCE 2? :CURSOR:SOURCE2 CH2 Cursor2 source is Channel 2. might return , indicating that the CURSOR:SOURCE? :CURSOR:SOURCE1 CH2 Cursor1 source is Channel 2. If you do not specify the cursor, the cursor 1 source is returned.
Page 150 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURSor:VBArs SNAp CURSor:VBArs? Related Commands DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP Arguments forces the position of vertical bar cursor 1 and 2 to snap to the waveform SNAp record points speciﬁed by the DATA:START and DATA:STOP commands, respectively. Examples forces vertical bar cursor1 to the DATA:START position CURSOR:VBARS SNAp...
Page 151 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command is the equivalent of selecting Cursor Setup from the Cursors menu, selecting V Bars Cursor Type, and then viewing or editing the desired cursor position. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3> CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>? Related Commands CURSor:VBArs:UNIts Arguments speciﬁes the cursor position.
Page 152 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the cursor position. <NR3> Returns A ﬂoating point value with an exponent. Examples positions the cursor2 vertical bar cursor at 9 ms. CURSor:VBArs:POS2 9.00E-6 this command might return CURSor:VBArs:POS1? :CURSOR:VBARS:POS1 , indicating that the cursor1 vertical bar is positioned at 1 ms. 1.0000E-06 CURSor:VBArs:UNIts This command sets or queries the units for the vertical bar cursors.
Page 153 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP Arguments forces the position of waveform cursor 1 and 2 to snap to the waveform SNAp record points speciﬁed by the DATA:START and DATA:STOP commands, respectively. Examples forces waveform cursor1 to the DATA:START CURSOR:WAVEFORM SNAP position and waveform cursor 2 to the DATA:STOP position.
Page 154 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor:WAVEform:POSition<x> This command sets or queries the position of a waveform cursor, which is constrained to be visible in the selected time base. (Use the CURSor:FUNCtion command to set the cursor function to Waveform.) The cursor is speciﬁed by x, which can be 1 or 2.
Page 155 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the cursor style to lines. CURSOR:WAVEFORM:STYLE LINES might return CURSOR:WAVEFORM:STYLE? :CURSOR:WAVEFORM:STYLE X indicating that the style for waveform cursors is X. CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts This command sets or queries the units for waveform cursors. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts BASe...
Page 156 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. The values returned for all XY cursor readouts, that do not pertain to the current CURSor:XY:READOUT setting, are returned as the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number): 99.1000E+36. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:XY? Examples might return CURSOR:XY? :CURSOR:XY:PRODDELTA...
Page 157 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to PRODuct. If the readout is set other than product, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36. Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:XY:PRODUCT<x>? Examples might return...
Page 158 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Cursor Syntax CURSor:XY:RATDELta? Examples might return CURSOR:XY:RATDELTA? :CURSOR:XY:RATDELTA -1.0167 indicating that the ΔY/ΔX ratio is -1.0167. CURSor:XY:RATIO<x>? (Query Only) This query-only command returns ratio the of the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) position for the speciﬁed cursor when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RATio.
Page 159 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return , indicating CURSOR:XY:RDELTA? :CURSOR:XY:RDELTA 6.9600 that the difference between the cursors radius is 6.9600 V. CURSor:XY:READOUT This command sets or queries the XY cursor readout (available when DISplay:FORMat is set to XY). Group Cursor Syntax...
Page 160 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the X position of the speciﬁed cursor in rectangular coordinates. <NR3> Examples sets the X position of Cursor 2 to 5.04 V in CURSor:XY:RECTX2 5.04 rectangular coordinates. might return , indicating CURSor:XY:RECTX1? :CURSOR:XY:RECTX1 5.1200 that the X position of Cursor 1 is set to 5.1200 in rectangular coordinates.
Page 161 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURSor:XY:THDELta? Examples might return CURSOR:XY:THDELTA? :CURSOR:XY:THDELTA 136.3748 indicating that the Dq XY cursor angle is 136.3748 degrees. CURSor:XY:THETA<x>? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the XY cursor angle in polar coordinates. The cursor is speciﬁed by x, which can be 1 or 2. NOTE.
Page 162 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor:XY:YDELta? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the XY cursor Y delta value in rectangular coordinates. NOTE. This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RECTangular. If the readout is set to other than rectangular coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Page 163 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is formatted as: <Block> #<x><yyy><data><newline>, where: <x> is the number of y bytes. For example, if <yyy>=500, then <x>=3) NOTE. <x> is hexadecimal format. The letters A-F denote a number of y bytes between 10 and 15 digits.
Page 164 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order resolution mode), you must conﬁgure the controller for long timeout thresholds. Data will not be transferred until a new waveform has been acquired since the previous :CURVENext? response. Group Waveform Transfer Syntax CURVENext? Related Commands CURVe?, DATa:DESTination, DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, WFMOutpre? Examples...
Page 165 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURVEStream {<Block>|<asc curve>} CURVEStream? Related Commands CURVe, DATa:DESTination, DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre?, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre?, WFMInpre:NR_FR, WFMOutpre:NR_FR? Arguments See the CURVe command. Returns Waveform data in its native binary format. To save processing time, DATa:ENCdg FASTEST is set and waveform data is shipped in its raw native format.
Page 166 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Waveform Transfer Syntax DATa:DESTination REF<x> DATa:DESTination? Related Commands CURVe Arguments is the reference where the waveform will be stored. The reference REF<x> number is speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 4. Examples might return , indicating that DATA:DESTINATION?
Page 167 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the ASCII representation of signed INT, FLOAT. If ASCII is ASCIi the value, then :BN_Fmt and :BYT_Or are ignored. speciﬁes that the data be sent in the fastest possible manner FAStest consistent with maintaining accuracy and is interpreted with respect to the ﬁrst waveform speciﬁed in the DATA:SOUrce list.
Page 168 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-15: DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings WFMOutpre Settings DATa:ENCdg Setting :ENCdg :BN_Fmt :BYT_Or :BYT_NR ASCii 1,2,4,8 FAStest RI/FP 1,2,4 RIBinary 1,2,8 RPBinary 1,2,8 FPBinary SRIbinary 1,2,8 SRPbinary 1,2,8 SFPbinary Examples sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer DATA:ENCDG RPBinary where the most signiﬁcant byte is transferred ﬁrst.
Page 169 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATa:FRAMESTARt might return indicating the :DATA:FRAMESTART 214 ﬁrst waveform frame that will be transferred. DATa:FRAMESTOP This command sets or queries the ending data frame for waveform transfer. This command allows for transferring partial frames of the waveform to and from the instrument.
Page 170 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax DATa:SOUrce <wfm>[<,><wfm>] DATa:SOUrce? Related Commands CURVe Arguments is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the <wfm> instrument to the controller. Examples speciﬁes that the CH1 waveforms will be transferred in the DATA:SOURCE CH1 next CURVe? query.
Page 171 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATa:STOP This command sets or queries the last data point that will be transferred when using the CURVe? query. This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to the controller. Changes to the record length value are not automatically reﬂected in the data:stop value.
Page 172 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATE This command sets or queries the date that the instrument can display. This command is equivalent to selecting Set Date & Time from the Utilities menu and then setting the ﬁelds in the Date group box. Group Miscellaneous Syntax...
Page 173 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can <QString> contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters.
Page 174 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command is equivalent to selecting Delete from the File menu, and then choosing the reference waveform you want to delete; choosing All Refs deletes all of the reference waveforms. Group Save and Recall Syntax DELEte:WAVEform {ALL|REF<x>} Related Commands RECAll:WAVEform,...
Page 175 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte Register. Use the *ESE command to set the ESER.
Page 176 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order the halt control is set to off using the DIAg:CONTROL:HALT command or that the halt control is set to ON but no failures occur). This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then enabling Loop Control.
Page 177 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg:FAILURES:CLEAR This command sets and queries the clearing of pass/fail information from data structures, not the Event Log, at the start of diagnostic tests. Group Diagnostics Syntax DIAg:FAILURES:CLEAR {<NR1>|OFF|ON} DIAg:FAILURES:CLEAR? Arguments clears pass/fail information from data structures, not the Event Log, at the start of tests.
Page 178 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return DIAG:ITEM? 2 :DIAG:ITEM 2,"Acquisition","Pass",0,8 indicating that the acquisition test passed and that there were 0 failures of the 8 subitems for that test. DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the total number of failures. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Page 179 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the index item about which data will be returned, which ranges from <NR1> 0 through 15. Examples might return DIAG:ITEM:NAME? 2 :DIAG:ITEM:NAME 2,"Acquisition" indicating that the selected menu item (2) is Acquisition. DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the result from the last execution of the item.
Page 180 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Diagnostics Syntax DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS? <NR1> Related Commands DIAg:ITEM?, DIAg:ITEM:NAMe?, DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?, DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? Arguments sets the index item about which data will be returned, which ranges from <NR1> 0 through 15. Examples might return DIAG:ITEM:SUBITEMS? 2 :DIAG:ITEM:SUBITEMS 2,8 indicating that there are 8 subitems associated with the selected item.
Page 181 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in progress. Group Diagnostics Syntax DIAg:LOOPS? Examples might return indicating that the selected set of DIAG:LOOPS? :DIAG:LOOPS 5 diagnostics was completed ﬁve times during the last diagnostic execution. DIAg:NAMe? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the names of the subsystem, area, and test of the current diagnostic test.
Page 182 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands DIAg:NAMe?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST? Examples might return indicating the DIAG:NAME:AREA? :DIAG:NAME:AREA "Memory" selected area name of the current diagnostic test. DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the subsystem of the current diagnostic test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Page 183 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg:NUMITEMS? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the number of items on the currently selected level of test hierarchy, which ranges from 1 through 15. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Page 184 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg:RESults:VERBose? (Query Only) This query-only command returns a more explanatory message about the results of the last diagnostic (or test) execution than the DIAg:RESults? query. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Page 185 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg:SELect:AREA This command selects or queries an available diagnostic area. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then selecting an Area from the pull-down list. NOTE. This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL is currently set to AREA.
Page 186 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands DIAg:EXECUTE, DIAg:LEVEL, DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?, DIAg:NUMITEMS?, DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS Arguments selects an integer that identiﬁes the number of the last item that will be <NR1> executed when the DIAg:EXECUTE command is run. Examples speciﬁes that (based on the example in the description DIAG:SELECT:LAST 2 above) only subsystem 2 will be executed.
Page 187 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIAg:SELect:TEST This command selects or queries one of the available tests. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then choosing a Test from the drop-down list. NOTE. This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL is currently set to TEST.
Page 188 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments starts execution of the diagnostics. EXECUTE puts the instrument into the state in which diagnostics can be run. This argument is thrown automatically if the DIAg:EXECUTE command is executed. disables diagnostics capabilities and returns the instrument to a normal operating state.
Page 189 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return DISPLAY? :DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW MONOGREEN; RECORDVIEW TEMPERATURE;USER:GRATICULE 165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100; CH2 300,50,100;CH3 60,50,100;CH4 240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0; REF2 0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4 240,90,100;MATH1 160,50,100; MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3 120,60,100;MATH4 195,50,100; HISTOGRAM 320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK 0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100;:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT; :DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT YT;GRATICULE IRE;INTENSITY :WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW 81.0000;RECORDVIEW 81.0000;:DISPLAY :INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT 0;...
Page 190 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples enables display of date and time. DISPLAY:CLOCK ON might return indicating that the display DISPLAY:CLOCK? :DISPLAY:CLOCK 1 of date and time is currently enabled. DISplay:COLOr? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the settings from the PALETTE, MATHCOLOR and REFCOLOR commands.
Page 191 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets color math traces in nominal palette math color, which is red. DEFAULT sets color math traces in the source waveform color. Math waveforms INHERIT are drawn in the same color as their primary source waveform. Examples sets the color math traces in the DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR DEFAULT...
Page 192 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order the Normal color palette is currently selected, which colors traces according to their channel. DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView This command sets or queries the color palette for all record view (non image view) waveforms. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView {NORMal|MONOGREEN|MONOGRAY|TEMPErature|SPECTral|USEr} DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView?
Page 193 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr RESET DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr? Arguments sets all user palettes to their default values. RESET Examples ? might return DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER :DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:GRATICULE 165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100;CH2 300 50,100;CH3 60,50,100;CH4 240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0;REF2 0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4 240,90,100;MATH1 160,50,100;MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3 120,60,100;MATH4 195,50,100;HISTOGRAM 320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK 0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CARet This command sets or queries the caret color for the user palette.
Page 194 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CH<x> This command sets or queries the hue-lightness-saturation (HLS) triplet to be used for the speciﬁed channel color for the user palette. The channel is speciﬁed by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4. Group Display Control Syntax...
Page 195 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the graticule DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:GRATICULE 330,75,100 color for the user palette. might return DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:GRATICULE? , indicating that :DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr:GRATICULE 300,60,85 the user palette graticule color is assigned a hue of 300, a lightness of 60, and a saturation of 85.
Page 196 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Hue. Range of 0 to 360. <NR1> Lightness. Range of 0 to 100. <NR1> Saturation. Range of 0 to 100. <NR1> Examples sets the mask color for DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MASK 330,75,100 the user palette. might return DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MASK? , indicating :DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr:MASK 330,50,90...
Page 197 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH<x> <NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1> DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH<x>? Arguments Hue. Range of 0 to 360. <NR1> Lightness. Range of 0 to 100. <NR1> Saturation. Range of 0 to 100. <NR1> Examples sets the color of the DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MATH2 330,75,100 speciﬁed Math 2 waveform for the user palette.
Page 198 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:WAVEform This command sets or queries the user palette waveform colors. It assigns the hue-lightness-saturation (HLS) triplet to be used for the speciﬁed waveform for the user palette. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:WAVEform {HLS|TEMPErature|SPECTral} DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:WAVEform? Arguments sets the color of user waveforms to the hue, lightness, and saturation speciﬁed by the DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:<wfm>...
Page 199 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments assigns color reference traces to the nominal palette reference color, DEFAULT which is off-white. assigns color reference traces to the source waveform color. INHERIT Examples assigns color reference traces to the DISPLAY:COLOR:REFCOLOR DEFAULT nominal palette reference color, which is off-white. might return DISPLAY:COLOR:REFCOLOR? :DISPLAY:COLOR:REFCOLOR...
Page 200 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax DISplay:FORMat {YT|XY|XYZ} DISplay:FORMat? Arguments sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the default mode. argument displays one waveform against another. The source pairs that make up an XY trace are predeﬁned and are listed in the following table. Selecting one source causes its corresponding source to be implicitly selected, producing a single trace from the two input waveforms.
Page 201 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes a frame and grid only. GRId speciﬁes an IRE video graticule, and sets the vertical scale to 143 mV per division. speciﬁes an NTSC video graticule (same as the graticule), and sets the NTSC vertical scale to 133 mV per division.
Page 202 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView <NR2> DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView? Related Commands DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView Arguments is the waveform saturation and ranges from 10 to 100 percent. <NR2> Examples sets the image view DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW 100 waveform saturation to 100 percent. might return DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW? , indicating that the...
Page 203 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISplay:PERSistence This command sets or queries the persistence aspect of the display. This affects the display only and is equivalent to selecting Display Persistence from the Display menu. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:PERSistence {OFF|INFPersist|VARpersist} DISplay:PERSistence? Related Commands DISplay:VARpersist Arguments...
Page 204 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISplay:SCREENTExt? (Query Only) This query-only command returns all screen text settings. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt? Related Commands DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DISplay: SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS Examples might reply: DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT? :DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:STATE 0;LABEL1:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 5;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 20;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME "";;XPOS 100;YPOS 35;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS 50;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME "";XPOS 100;YPOS...
Page 205 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:FONTCOlor This command sets or queries the screen text label font color. <x> is the label number, 1 through 8. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:FONTCOlor <QString> DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:FONTCOlor? Arguments argument is the font color to be displayed for a given label. <QString>...
Page 206 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:FONTSIze This command sets or queries the screen text label font size. <x> is the label number which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:FONTSIze <NR1> DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:FONTSIze? Arguments is the font size to be displayed for a given label. <NR1>...
Page 207 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe <QString> DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe? Related Commands , DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS Arguments argument is the text to be displayed for a given label. <QString> Examples sets the DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:NAME "THIS IS SCREEN TEXT" screen text for Label 2 to THIS IS SCREEN TEXT. might return DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABEL2:NAME? , indicating that the...
Page 208 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS This command sets the horizontal position of a given screen text label. The label is speciﬁed by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 8. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS <NR1> Related Commands DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS...
Page 209 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:YPOS? , indicating that screen Label 3 is :DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:YPOS 192 vertically positioned to 192. DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE This command controls the display of screen text. Group Display Control Syntax DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>} Related Commands DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DISplay: SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS...
Page 210 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments enables the remote display of waveform and other graticule data. disables the remote display of waveform and other graticule data. = 0 disables remote display of waveform and other graticule data; any other value enables remote display of waveform and other graticule data. Examples enables remote display of waveform and other DISPLAY:SHOWREMOTE ON...
Page 211 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order The instrument will only display the bar if the associated trigger source is also displayed. If both a main and a delayed trigger are displayed, then two bars will appear. One will accompany each source. If a logic trigger is selected, then multiple bars may appear.
Page 212 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples disables the trigger T. DISPLAY:TRIGT OFF might return indicating that the trigger T is DISPLAY:TRIGT ? :TRIGT 1 displayed. DISplay:VARpersist This command sets or queries persistence decay time, which is the approximate decay time for a freshly struck persistence sample. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu, selecting the Appearance tab, and then entering the desired Persist Time.
Page 213 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 removes waveforms from the display; any other value displays the <NR1> waveforms. Examples removes waveforms from the display. DISPLAY:WAVEFORM OFF might return , indicating that waveforms DISPLAY:WAVEFORM? :WAVEFORM 1 are displayed. EMail (No Query Form) This command (no query form) sends a test e-mail message or sets the current e-mail sent count to zero.
Page 214 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes that 15 attempts will be made to send the e-mail EMAIL:ATTEMPTS 15 to the SMTP e-mail server. might return , indicating that 10 EMAIL:ATTEMPTS? :EMAIL:ATTEMPTS 10 attempts will be made to send the e-mail to the SMTP e-mail server. EMail:AUTHLogin This command sets or queries the login name that will be used if the SMTP e-mail server requires one for authentication.
Page 215 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EMail:COUNt? (Query Only) This query only command returns the number of e-mails that have been sent since Email on Event was armed. The range of values returned can be from 0 to 50. Group E-mail Syntax EMail:COUNt? Examples...
Page 216 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax EMail:HOSTwanted {<QString>} EMail:HOSTwanted? Arguments argument is a string that speciﬁes the host name to be used with the <QString> SMTP e-mail server if the default DPO host name will not work. Examples speciﬁes that LazyEight will be used as the EMAIL:HOSTWANTED "LazyEight"...
Page 217 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group E-mail Syntax EMail:MASK {ON|OFF|<NR1>} EMail:MASK? Arguments argument enables sending e-mail when a mask test failure occurs. disables sending e-mail when a mask test failure occurs. = 0 disables sending e-mail when a mask test failure occurs; any other <NR1>...
Page 218 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group E-mail Syntax EMail:MEASUrement {ON|OFF|<NR1>} EMail:MEASUrement? Arguments enables the inclusion of measurement data in e-mail. disables the inclusion of measurement data in e-mail. = 0 disables the inclusion of measurement data in the e-mail; any other <NR1>...
Page 219 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group E-mail Syntax EMail:SMTPPort {<NR1>} EMail:SMTPPort? Arguments can be 1 through 65535. This number speciﬁes the TCPIP port number. <NR1> Examples speciﬁes that the SMTP e-mail server will communicate EMAIL:SMTPPORT55 on TCPIP port 55. might return , indicating that TCPIP EMAIL:SMTPPORT? :EMAIL:SMTPPORT 10...
Page 220 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns The status might be one of the following strings: PASS - indicates that the last e-mail message sent was successful or that no email message was attempted. FAIL - indicates that the last e-mail message attempted was not sent. SEND - indicates that an e-mail message is currently being sent.
Page 221 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax EMail:TO <string> EMail:TO? Arguments argument is the e-mail address of the recipient (or recipients). <string> Multiple addresses are separated with semicolons (;). For example, “johndoe@tek.com;billsmith@tek.com” speciﬁes that both johndoe and billsmith at tek.com will receive e-mail when the event occurs. The length of this string is limited to 252 characters.
Page 222 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group E-mail Syntax EMail:WAVEform {ON|OFF|<NR1>} EMail:WAVEform? Arguments enables the inclusion of waveform data in e-mail. disables the inclusion of waveform data in e-mail. = 0 disables the inclusion of waveform data in the e-mail; any other value <NR1>...
Page 223 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ, *ESE 209 EXE, and OPC bits. might return 186, showing that the ESER contains the binary value *ESE? 10111010. *ESR? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR).
Page 224 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EVMsg? (Query Only) This query-only command removes a single event code from the Event Queue that is associated with the results of the last *ESR? read and returns the event code along with an explanatory message. For more information, see Event Handling. Group Status and Error Syntax...
Page 225 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EXPort This command sends a copy of the waveform to the ﬁle path speciﬁed by EXPort:FILEName. The EXPort query returns image format and ﬁle information. Group Hard Copy Syntax EXPort STARt EXPort? Arguments initiates the export. STARt Examples initiates export to the ﬁle speciﬁed ﬁle by EXPort:FILEName.
Page 226 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return EXPORT:FILENAME? :EXPORT:FILENAME as the selected "C:\TekScope\Screen Captures\TEK.BMP" ﬁle. EXPort:FORMat This command sets or returns the image format for exporting waveforms to a ﬁle. Group Hard Copy Syntax EXPort:FORMat {BMP|JPEG|PNG|PCX|TIFF} EXPort:FORMat? Arguments speciﬁes BMP image format. speciﬁes JPEG image format.
Page 227 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the export color palette to Color. EXPORT:PALETTE might return COLOR indicating the EXPORT:PALETTE? :EXPORT PALETTE hard copy output will be in color. EXPort:READOuts This command sets or queries the area on the screen where the readout appear for export.
Page 228 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the exported view area to Full Screen. EXPORT:VIEW FULLSCREEN might return , indicating that only EXPORT:VIEW? :EXPORT:VIEW GRATICULE the graticule area of the screen will be exported. FACtory (No Query Form) This command (no query form) resets the instrument to its factory default settings. This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button located on the instrument front panel or selecting Recall Default Setup from the File menu.
Page 229 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples resets the instrument to its factory default settings. FACTORY FASTAcq? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the state of Fast Acquisitions. This command is equivalent to pressing the FASTACQ button on the front panel. Group Acquisition Syntax...
Page 230 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FASTAcq:STATE This command sets or queries the state of Fast Acquisitions. This command is equivalent to the FASTACQ button on the front panel. Group Acquisition Syntax FASTAcq:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>} FASTAcq:STATE? Arguments enables Fast Acquisitions mode. disables Fast Acquisitions mode. = 0 disables Fast Acquisitions mode;...
Page 231 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FILESystem:COPy (No Query Form) This command (no query form) copies a named ﬁle to a new ﬁle. The new ﬁle may be in a totally separate directory than the old ﬁle. You can only copy one ﬁle at a time using this command.
Page 232 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax FILESystem:CWD {<new working directory path>} Arguments is a quoted string that deﬁnes the current <new working directory path> working; a directory name can be up to 128 characters. Examples sets the current FILESYSTEM:CWD "C:\TekScope\Screen Captures" working directory to Screen Captures.
Page 233 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:MKDir Arguments None Examples returns a list of ﬁles and directories in the current working FILESYSTEM:DIR? directory. FILESystem:MKDir (No Query Form) This command (no query form) creates a new directory. Group File System Syntax FILESystem:MKDir <directory path>...
Page 234 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command is not IEEE 488.2 compliant for the following reasons: The command produces output on the 488.2 bus. Queries, not commands, are the only message units that should produce output on the 488.2 bus. Errors may not be recognized if they occur while data is being output in response to this command.
Page 235 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command is not IEEE 488.2 compliant for the following reasons: The command produces output on the 488.2 bus. Queries, not commands, are the only message units that should produce output on the 488.2 bus. Errors may not be recognized if they occur while data is being output in response to this command.
Page 236 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a quoted string that deﬁnes the ﬁle name and path. If the ﬁle <old file path> path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the ﬁle name. is a quoted string that deﬁnes the ﬁle name and path. If the ﬁle <new file path>...
Page 237 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a quoted string that deﬁnes the ﬁle name and path. If the ﬁle <file path> path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the ﬁle name. can be either DEFINITE LENGTH or INDEFINITE LENGTH <data>...
Page 238 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. Use the *WAI command between HARDCopy STARt commands to ensure that the ﬁrst hard copy is complete before starting another. Examples initiates a screen copy to a ﬁle or the default system printer, as HARDCOPY START speciﬁed by the :HARDCopy:PORT selection.
Page 239 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax HARDCopy:LAYout {PORTRait|LANdscape} HARDCopy:LAYout? Arguments orients the screen image vertically on the printed page. PORTRait orients the screen image horizontally on the printed page. LANDscape Examples sets the hard copy page orientation to HARDCOPY:LAYOUT LANDSCAPE Landscape.
Page 240 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax HARDCopy:PORT {FILE|PRINTER} HARDCopy:PORT? Related Commands HARDCopy, HARDCopy:FILEName Arguments argument speciﬁes that the hard copy is stored in the ﬁle speciﬁed in the FILE HARDCopy:FILEName command. argument speciﬁes that the hard copy is sent to the printer speciﬁed PRINTER in the Print dialog box.
Page 241 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments places the readouts off the graticule area. OFFGRATICULE places the readouts on the graticule area on hardcopies. ONGRATICULE HARDCopy:VIEW This command sets or returns the area of the screen to be hard copied. Group Hardcopy Syntax HARDCopy:VIEW {FULLSCREEN|GRAticule|FULLNOmenu}...
Page 242 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the instrument to include headers on applicable query responses. You can then use the query response as a command. = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any other value sets <NR1>...
Page 243 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return , indicating that the instrument is including HEADER? :HEADER 1 headers on applicable query responses. HIStogram? (Query Only) This query-only command returns all histogram parameters; it queries the state of all histogram parameters that the user can set. This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu.
Page 244 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the left position of the histogram box in source waveform <NR3> coordinates. speciﬁes the top position of the histogram box in source waveform <NR3> coordinates. speciﬁes the right position of the histogram box in source waveform <NR3>...
Page 245 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes the right position of the histogram box in percentage coordinates. <NR2> The default value is 70.0. speciﬁes the bottom position of the histogram box in percentage <NR2> coordinates. The default value is 75.2. Examples sets the left boundary of the HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT 30.0,25.0,70.0,75.0 histogram box to 30% of the graticule (3 divisions from the left edge);...
Page 246 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order The Histogram:DATa? query corresponds to the Histogram Data (CSV) controls included in the instrument user interface. To ﬁnd these controls, select either Edit > Copy > Setup > Measurements tab or the File > Save As > Histogram button. This command returns only histogram data values separated by commas on a single line.
Page 247 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Histogram Syntax HIStogram:DISplay {OFF|LOG|LINEAr} HIStogram:DISplay? Related Commands HIStogram:MODe, HIStogram:STATE Arguments disables the histogram display but allows histogram data to accumulate. <OFF> This argument provides for backward compatibility with older DPO Series instruments; it does not affect a change in the display scaling of the histogram. When queried, HIStogram:DISplay? will return if the histogram state or mode has been disabled using the HIStogram:MODe or HIStogram:STATE commands.
Page 248 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the histogram mode to the horizontal HISTOGRAM:FUNCTION HORIZONTAL display mode. might return HISTOGRAM:FUNCTION? :HISTOGRAM:FUNCTION VERTICAL indicating that the vertical display mode is selected for the histogram. HIStogram:MODe This command selects the type of histogram to create or disables the histogram display.
Page 249 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Histogram Syntax HIStogram:SIZe <NR3> HIStogram:SIZe? Related Commands HIStogram:DISplay Arguments speciﬁes the histogram size. The value can vary from 0.1 to 8.0 divisions in <NR3> HORizontal mode and from 0.1 to 10.0 divisions in VERTical mode. Resolution is to the nearest pixel.
Page 250 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples enables the Channel 1 waveform to be compared HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1 against the histogram box. The default time base, Main, is used for the histogram display. might return , indicating that HISTOGRAM:SOURCE? :HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1 the waveform for Channel 1 is the source for the histogram. HIStogram:STATE This command sets or queries whether the histogram calculations are enabled.
Page 251 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 0.00000000000;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO 1.0000;POSITION 50.0000;UNITS:STRING "s";:HORIZONTAL:ROLL AUTO;MODE AUTO;MODE:AUTO:LIMITRECORDLEN 200000;:HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH 1000;SAMPLERATE 40.0000E+9;SCAL HORizontal:ACQDURATION? (Query Only) This query returns the timebase duration. Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:ACQDURATION? Returns <NR3> Examples might return HORIZONTAL:ACQDURATION? :HORIZONTAL:ACQDURATION , indicating the acquisition duration is 5.0 us. 5.0E-9 HORizontal:ACQLENGTH? (Query Only) This query returns the record length.
Page 252 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:DIVisions? Arguments None. Examples might return HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS? :HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS 10.0000 indicating that the waveform is displayed across ten division. HORizontal:FASTframe? (Query Only) This query-only command returns all of the settings for the horizontal FastFrame commands.
Page 253 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt <NR1> HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt? Related Commands HORizontal:MODE:RECOrdlength Arguments indicates the number of frames to acquire. <NR1> Examples sets up FastFrame mode to acquire two HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 2 frames (segments) of data. might return HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT? , indicating that FastFrame mode is :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 4 currently set to acquire 4 frames of data.
Page 254 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm> <NR1> HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm>? Related Commands HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm>, HORizontal: FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe, HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt Arguments speciﬁes the start frame number on the speciﬁed waveform. <NR1> Examples sets the HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:FRAMESTART:CH1 3 start frame number to frame 3 on Channel 1. might HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:FRAMESTART:CH1? return...
Page 255 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm> This command sets or queries the number of frames on the speciﬁed waveform for the FastFrame multiple frames feature. The multiple frames feature supports displaying multiple frames in an overlaid manner. Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm>...
Page 256 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce, HORizontal:FASTframe: TIMEStamp:DELTa:<wfm>?, HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF?, HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk Arguments speciﬁes the FastFrame reference frame. <NR1> Examples sets the FastFrame reference frame HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME 2 to 2. might return HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME? , indicating that the FastFrame :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME 3 reference frame is currently set to 3. HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce This command sets or queries FastFrame Reference waveform source.
Page 257 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:CH<x> This command sets or queries the FastFrame selected frame number on the speciﬁed waveform. Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:CH<x> <NRF> HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:CH<x>? Arguments is the selected frame number. <NRF> Examples selects frame 5 on Channel 1. HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH1 5 might return HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH1?
Page 258 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:REF<x> <NRF> HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:REF<x>? Arguments is the selected frame number. <NRF> Examples selects frame 1 on Reference HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF1 1 1 waveform. might return HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF1? , indicating frame 25 on :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF1 25 Reference 1 waveform is the selected frame. HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:SOUrce This command sets or returns the FastFrame source waveform.
Page 259 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal:FASTframe:SEQuence This command sets or queries the FastFrame single-sequence mode stop condition. Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:SEQuence {FIRst|LAST} HORizontal:FASTframe:SEQuence? Arguments sets single sequence to stop after n frames. FIRst sets single sequence to stop manually. LAST Examples sets single-sequence mode to stop HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SEQUENCEFirst...
Page 260 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples turns on horizontal FastFrame. HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE ON might return HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE? , indicating that the current state of :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE 0 FastFrame is off. HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame This command sets or queries the summary frame mode. When ENVelope is selected, the last frame in a FastFrame acquisition is an envelope of all the prior frames in the acquisition.
Page 261 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DD MON YYYY HH:MM:SS.xxx xxx xxx xxx DD MON YYYY is day, month, and year HH:MM:SS is hours, minutes, and seconds .xxx xxx xxx xxx is fractions of a second to picoseconds Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL:<wfm>? <NR1>, <NR1>...
Page 262 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:BETWEEN:CH1? return :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:BETWEEN:CH1 This is the delta of Channel 1’s Time 5,2,"00:00:00.010 000 540 624" Stamp frame 5 - Time Stamp frame 2 (TS[5]-TS[2]). HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa:<wfm>? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the relative time between the triggers of the FastFrame Selected and the FastFrame Reference, within the speciﬁed waveform.
Page 263 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAMe:<wfm>? <NR1> Arguments is the frame number for which the timestamp will be returned on the <NR1> speciﬁed waveform. Examples might return HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:FRAME:CH1? :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:FRAME:CH1 10,"02 Mar 2000 which is the time stamp of Channel 1, frame 10. 20:10:54.536 036 928 432"...
Page 264 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DD MON YYYY HH:MM:SS.xxx xxx xxx xxx DD MON YYYY is day, month, and year HH:MM:SS is hours, minutes, and seconds .xxx xxx xxx xxx is fractions of a second to picoseconds Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SELECTED:<wfm>? Related Commands HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:SOUrce...
Page 265 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk {LIVE|ALL} HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk? Related Commands HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme, HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce, HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:SOUrce Arguments sets FastFrame Track to Live. LIVE sets FastFrame Track to All. Examples sets FastFrame Track to live. HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK LIVE might return HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK? , indicating that all FastFrame Selected :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK ALL Frames and the FastFrame Reference will be locked together.
Page 266 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:ALL:REF<x>? <NR1>,<NR1> Arguments speciﬁes the ﬁrst and last frame of a range of frames. <NR1> Examples might HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:ALL:REF1? return :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:ALL:REF1 1,3,"1: , giving the ﬁrst 2.5265E-009","2: 3.9010E-010","3: 3.8285E-009" 3XZERO times for Reference 1. HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:FRAme:CH<x>? (Query Only) This command queries the time from the trigger to the start of the speciﬁed frame on the speciﬁed channel.
Page 267 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:FRAME:REF1? , indicating :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:FRAME:REF1 3,3.8285E-9 the time from the trigger to the start of frame 3 on Reference 1 is 3.83 ns. HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:REF? (Query Only) This command sets or queries the time from the trigger to the trigger sample on the reference waveform.
Page 268 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return HORizontal:FASTframe:XZEro:SELECTED:REF1? :HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:XZERO:SELECTED:REF1 35.1000E-12 indicating that the selected Reference 1 waveform trigger sample occurred 35.1 ps after the trigger. HORizontal:MAIn? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the time per division of the time base. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu.
Page 269 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples enables the time base trigger delay mode. HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE ON might return HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE? :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 1 indicating that the time base trigger delay mode is currently enabled. HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition This command sets or queries the time base position when Horizontal Delay Mode is turned on.
Page 270 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe <NR3> HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe? Related Commands HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe, HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition Arguments speciﬁes the time base trigger delay time setting, typically represented in <NR3> seconds. Examples sets the time base trigger delay time to 5 ms. HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 5.0E-3 might return HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME? :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:DELAY...
Page 271 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe Arguments argument can range from 0 to ≈100 and is the percentage of the waveform <NR3> that is displayed left of the center graticule. NOTE. The upper limit of the waveform position is slightly limited by a value that is determined from the record length (upper limit = 100 - 1/record length).
Page 272 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing <string> HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing? Related Commands HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts Arguments is the time base units string. <string> Examples sets the units string for the time HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS:STRING “LUM” base trigger delay to lumens. might return HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS:STRING? , indicating that the units string for :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS:STRING "lum"...
Page 273 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the horizontal mode to auto. HORIZONTAL:MODE AUTO ? might return , indicating that HORIZONTAL:MODE :HORIZONTAL:MODE MANUAL the horizontal mode is manual. HORizontal:MODE:AUTO:LIMITrecordlen This command sets or queries the record length limit used by the auto horizontal mode.
Page 274 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH? , indicating that the record :HORIZONTAL:MODEL:RECORDLENGTH 1000000 length is set to 1,000,000 samples HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate This command sets or queries the sample rate. Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate <NR1> HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate? Arguments is the sample rate in samples per second. <NR1>...
Page 275 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal:ROLL This command sets or queries the Roll Mode status. Use Roll Mode when you want to view data at very slow sweep speeds. It is useful for observing data samples on the screen as they occur. This command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu, selecting the Acquisition tab, and setting the Roll Mode to Auto or Off.
Page 276 This query-only command returns the instrument identiﬁcation code. Group Miscellaneous Syntax *IDN? Related Commands Examples might return *IDN? :TEKTRONIX,DPO7104,10000001,CF:91.1CT , indicating the instrument model number, serial number, FV:01.00.912, conﬁgured number, and ﬁrmware version number. 2-264 DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 277 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LIMit? (Query Only) This query-only command returns all settings for the Limit commands. NOTE. The command works only if the LT Limit Test option is enabled. Group Limit Test Syntax LIMit? Examples might return LIMIT? :LIMIT:BEEP 0;COMPARE:CH1 NONE;CH2 NONE;CH3 NONE;CH4 NONE;REF1 NONE;REF2 NONE;REF3 NONE;REF4 NONE;MATH1 NONE;MATH2 NONE;MATH3 NONE;MATH4...
Page 278 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples causes a beep when any waveform data exceeds the limits LIMIT:BEEP ON speciﬁed in the limit test. might return , indicating that the instrument will LIMIT:BEEP? :LIMIT:BEEP 0 not beep when waveform data exceeds the limits speciﬁed in the limit test. LIMit:COMpare (No Query Form) This command resets the Limit Test comparison template.
Page 279 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes REF1 as the template waveform against LIMIT:COMPARE:CH1 REF1 which to compare waveforms acquired using Channel 1. might return , indicating LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2? :LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2 REF4 that the waveform acquired by Channel 2 is compared to the template waveform stored in REF4.
Page 280 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Limit Test Syntax LIMit:COMpare:REF<x> {NONe|REF<x>} LIMit:COMpare:REF<x>? Arguments argument turns off template testing for the reference waveform speciﬁed NONe by REF<x>. argument selects which reference waveform to use as the template against REF<x> which to compare the reference waveform speciﬁed by REF<x>...
Page 281 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples enables the e-mail feature so that when the source waveform LIMIT:EMAIL 1 data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, an e-mail is generated. might return , indicating that the e-mail LIMIT:EMAIL? :LIMIT:EMAIL 0 feature is disabled and that an e-mail will not be generated when the source waveform exceeds the limits of the limit test.
Page 282 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits This command sets or queries whether violation highlighting occurs when limit testing is active, and, if the RESET argument is set, clears the highlighting. NOTE. The command works only if the LT Limit Test option is enabled. Group Limit Test Syntax...
Page 283 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LIMit:LOCk This command sets or queries whether vertical scaling and positioning affect both source and template for template comparison pairs. NOTE. The command works only if the LT Limit Test option is enabled. Group Limit Test Syntax LIMit:LOCk {OFF|ON|<NR1>} LIMit:LOCk?
Page 284 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 disables the save log ﬁle feature so that when the source waveform data <NR1> exceeds the limits set by the limit test, a log ﬁle is not saved; any other value enables the save log ﬁle feature so that when the source waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, a log ﬁle is saved.
Page 285 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LIMit:SAVEWFM:FILEName This command sets or queries the path where waveforms or log ﬁles will be saved when the waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test. NOTE. The command works only if the LT Limit Test option is enabled. Group Limit Test Syntax...
Page 286 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 disables sending an SRQ when the waveform data falls outside of the <NR1> limits set by the limit test; any other value enables generation of an SRQ when the waveform data falls outside of the limits set by the limit test. For queries, a 0 is returned if SRQ is off;...
Page 287 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Limit Test Syntax LIMit:STATus? Examples might return , indicating that the limit LIMIT:STATUS? :LIMIT:STATUS PASS test is passing. LIMit:STOPOnviolation This command sets or queries whether acquisitions are stopped when the waveform data exceeds the test limits. NOTE.
Page 288 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Limit Test Syntax LIMit:TEMPlate:DESTination {REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4} LIMit:TEMPlate:DESTination? Arguments speciﬁes the reference waveform destination in which the template REF<x> waveform is to be stored. Examples speciﬁes that the template waveform LIMIT:TEMPLATE:DESTINATION REF2 referred to with the LIMit:TEMPlate:STORe command is stored as the REF2 waveform.
Page 289 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LIMit:TEMPlate:STORe (No Query Form) This command (no query form) saves the speciﬁed source waveform to the speciﬁed reference or ﬁle name. NOTE. The command works only if the LT Limit Test option is enabled. Group Limit Test Syntax LIMit:TEMPlate:STORe <wfm>,{REF<x>|<file path>}...
Page 290 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the amount, in horizontal divisions, by which the current source <NR3> waveform is allowed to deviate from the template waveform without exceeding the limits set in the limit test. The range is 0 to 5 divisions. Examples speciﬁes that the current LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL 1.0...
Page 291 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Miscellaneous Syntax LOCk {ALL|NONe} LOCk? Related Commands UNLock Arguments disables all front panel controls. enables all front panel controls. This is equivalent to the UNLock NONe command. If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the LOCk command has no effect.
Page 292 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FULLSCREEN;:APPLICATION:EXTAPP:STATE NOTRUNNING;:VARIABLE:EVENT:REPORT BOTH;:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE FALLING;:CMDBATCH 1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW TEMPERATURE;RECORDVIEW NORMAL;USER:GRATICULE 165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100;CH2 300,50,100;CH3 60,50,100;CH4 240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0;REF2 0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4 240,90,100;MATH1 160,50,100;MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3 120,60,100;MATH4 195,50,100;HISTOGRAM 320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK 0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100;:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR DEFAULT MARK This commands moves to the next or previous reference mark, or it queries the current mark setup.
Page 293 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MARK:CREATE {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>|COLUMN} Arguments creates the mark on a channel waveform, where <x> is the channel number. CH<x> creates the mark on the math waveform. MATH<x> creates the mark on a reference waveform, where <x> is the reference REF<x>...
Page 294 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MARK:FREE? Examples might return , indicating there are 1,011 marks MARK:FREE? :MARK:FREE 1011 available for use. MARK:SELected:END? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the end of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the waveform. Group Search and Mark Syntax...
Page 295 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments <QString> is the quoted string label for the mark. Examples “Test 42.3” sets the selected mark to a User mark and MARK:SELECTED:LABEL changes the mark description to Test 42.3. ? might return MARK:SELECTED:LABEL :MARK:SELECTED:LABEL "+Edge: , indicating that the label description for the selected mark is level=420.32mV"...
Page 296 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MARK:SELected:SOURCE? Examples might return MARK:SELECTED:SOURCE? :MARK:SELECTED:SOURCE CH2 indicating that Channel 2 is the selected mark source. MARK:SELected:STARt? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the starting point of the selected mark, 0 to 100% of the waveform. Group Search and Mark Syntax...
Page 297 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARK:SELected:ZOOm:POSition? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the position of the selected mark, of the zoom overview window. If the return value is less than zero then the zoom scale will not be changed when Next or Prev makes this the selected mark. Group Search and Mark Syntax...
Page 298 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the states of all settable mask parameters. Group Mask Syntax MASK? Examples might return the following response: MASK? :MASK:FILTER 0;AUTOADJUST 0;AUTOADJUST:HDELTA 10;VDELTA 10;:MASK:AUTOSET:AUTOADJUST 1;HPOS 1;HSCALE 1;MODE MANUAL;OFFSETADJ 1;TRIGGER 1;VPOS 1;VSCALE 1;STANDARD NONE;USER:ONE 0.0000;ZERO 0.0000;TYPE NORMALIZED;:MASK:SOURCE CH1;COUNT:FAILURES 0;HITS 0;SEG1: 3A 4D 41 53 4B 3A 46 49 4C 54 45 52 20 30 3B 41 55 54 4F 41...
Page 299 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments enables the autoadjust function. disables the autoadjust function. = 0 disables the autoadjust function; any other value enables it. <NR1> Examples enables the autoadjust function. MASK:AUTOADJUST ON might return , indicating that the MASK:AUTOADJUST? :MASK:AUTOADJUST 1 autoadjust function is enabled.
Page 300 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA {<NR3>} MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that represents a percent of a division. <NR3> Examples sets the vertical autoﬁt search to 0.6 of a MASK:AUTOADJUST:VDELTA 0.6 division. might return MASK:AUTOADJUST:VDELTA? :MASK:AUTOADJUST:VDELTA 2 indicating that the vertical autoﬁt search is set to 2 divisions.
Page 301 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only an autoset on a standard mask, not the general instrument autoset function. Group Mask Syntax MASK:AUTOSet:HPOS {ON|OFF|<NR1>} MASK:AUTOSet:HPOS? Arguments enables the autoset:hpos function. disables the autoset:hpos function. = 0 disables the autoset:hpos function;...
Page 302 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:AUTOSet:MODe This command controls whether a mask autoset will be automatically done after a standard mask is selected. The autoset will never happen if the standard mask is selected from GPIB, since a “SET?” sent back to the oscilloscope should not perform a mask autoset.
Page 303 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 disables the autoset:offsetadj function; any other value enables it. <NR1> Examples enables the autoset:offsetadj function. MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ ON might return MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ? :MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ 1 indicating that the autoset:offsetadj function is enabled. MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard This command selects the standard mask in a mask autoset. This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only an autoset on a standard mask, not the general instrument autoset function.
Page 304 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order |SFI5_XMITADATA2|SFI5_XMITCDATA2|SFI5_XMITACLK2 |SFI5_XMITCCLK2|SFI5_RCVBDATA2|SFI5_RCVDDATA2 |SFI5_RCVBCLK2|SFI5_RCVDCLK2|SFI5_XMITADATA3 |SFI5_XMITCDATA3|SFI5_XMITACLK3|SFI5_XMITCCLK3 |SFI5_RCVBDATA3|SFI5_RCVDDATA3|SFI5_RCVBCLK3 |SFI5_RCVDCLK3|PCIEXPRESS_Xmit|PCIEXPRESS_Rcv |SAS1_5_IR|SAS1_5_CR|SAS1_5_XR|SAS1_5_IR_AASJ |SAS1_5_CR_AASJ|SAS1_5_XR_AASJ|SAS1_5_SATA |SAS3_0_IR|SAS3_0_CR|SAS3_0_XR|SAS3_0_IR_AASJ |SAS3_0_CR_AASJ|SAS3_0_XR_AASJ|SAS3_0_SATA |STM0_1|STM0_0|STM0_HDBX|STM1E_0|STM1E_1|STS1Pulse |STS1Eye|STS3|STS3_Max|TFI5_2|TFI5_3 |USERMask|VIDEO270|VIDEO292M|VIDEO360|VSROC192} MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard? Arguments (Serial ATA, G1 Tx, 1.5 Gb/s) ATATXG1 (Serial ATA, G2 Tx, 3.0 Gb/s) ATATXG2 (Serial ATA, G3 Tx). ATATXG3 (Serial ATA, G1 Rx 1.5 Gb/s) ATARXG1 (Serial ATA, G2, Rx, 3.0 Gb/s) ATARXG2...
Page 305 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E4 Binary 0) E4_0 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E4 Binary 1) E4_1 (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI X3.263-1995, 100 Base-Tx, STP, ENET100STP 125 Mb/s ) (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI X3.263-1995, 100 Base-Tx, UTP, ENET100UTP 125 Mb/s) (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI X3.263-1995, GB Ethernet, 1.25 Gb/s)
Page 306 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm) FC2125E_ABT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Delta, Transm) FC2125E_ADT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, FC2125E_AGT Transm) (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Recv) FC2125E_ABR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Delta, Recv) FC2125E_ADR...
Page 307 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (USB, HS:T3, 480 Mb/s) HST3 (USB, HS:T4, 480 Mb/s) HST4 (USB, HS:T5, 480 Mb/s) HST5 (USB, HS:T6, 480 Mb/s) HST6 (InﬁniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a, 2.5 Optical, 2.5 Gb/s) INF2_5G (InﬁniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a, 2.5 Electrical, 2.5 Gb/s) INF2_5GE (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000 OC1/STM0, 51.84 Mb/s) (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000 OC1/STM1, 155.52, Mb/s)
Page 308 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (Rapid IO Serial, 3.25 Gb/s) RIO_SERIAL_3G (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) SFI5_XMITADATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) SFI5_XMITCDATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) SFI5_XMITACLK2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) SFI5_XMITCCLK2...
Page 309 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples selects the E1 Coax standard mask. MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD E1COAX might return MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD? :MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD , indicating that the E1 Coax mask is selected as the current mask standard. E1COAX MASK:AUTOSet:TRIGger This command speciﬁes whether a mask AUTOSet affects the trigger level.
Page 310 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the level 1 value used by autoset for user masks. <NR3> Examples sets the autoset for 1 in user masks is 1.0 volts. MASK:AUTOSET:USER:ONE 1 might return : 0.0000, MASK:AUTOSET:USER:ONE? MASK:AUTOSET:USER:ONE indicating that the autoset is using 0.0 volts for 1 in user masks. MASK:AUTOSet:USER:TYPe This command sets or queries how autoset scales a mask.
Page 311 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the zero level that autoset uses for user masks. <NR3> Examples sets the autoset for zero in user masks to MASK:AUTOSET:USER:ZERO 1.000 scales in a mask to normalize. might return MASK:AUTOSET:USER:ZERO? :MASK:AUTOSET:USER:ZERO , indicating that the autoset is using 0.0 volts for zero in user masks. 0.0000 MASK:AUTOSet:VPOS This command controls whether the mask autoset algorithm will affect the vertical...
Page 312 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle {ON|OFF|<NR1>} MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle? Arguments enables the autoset:vscale function. disables the autoset:vscale function. = 0 disables the autoset:vscale function; any other value enables it. <NR1> Examples enables the autoset:vscale function. MASK:AUTOSET:VSCALE ON might return MASK:AUTOSET:VSCALE? :MASK:AUTOSET:VSCALE 0.0000 indicating that the autoset:vcale function is disabled.
Page 313 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:COUNt:FAILURES? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the number of pass/fail tests that have failed. The default is 0. Pass/fail testing must be enabled. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:FAILURES? Returns <NR1> Examples might return , showing MASK:COUNT:FAILURES? :MASK:COUNT:FAILURES 0 that no tests have failed.
Page 314 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the mask segment number. <m> Returns <NR1> Examples might return MASK:COUNT:SEG1:HITS? :MASK:COUNT:SEG1:HITS 0 showing that there have been no hits. MASK:COUNt:STATE This command sets or queries the mask hits count state; it controls whether mask counting is being done.
Page 315 :MASK:COUNT:TESTS 50 tests have occurred. MASK:COUNt:TOTal? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the sum of all hits in all mask segments. This command is the same as MASK:COUNT:HITS? and is kept for compatibility with other Tektronix instruments. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:TOTal? Returns <NR1>...
Page 316 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the number of waveforms that have been acquired and processed during pass/fail testing. Group Mask Syntax MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS? Related Commands MASK:COUNt:TESTS?, MASK:COUNt:TOTal?, MASK:COUNt: VIOLATIONS? Returns <NR1> Examples might return MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS? :MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS 1000 showing that 1,000 waveforms have been acquired and processed.
Page 317 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:FILTer This command sets or returns whether the selected digital ﬁlter will be run on the waveform data. The ﬁlter simulates optical hardware. That is, it simulates different hardware for each of several different optical standards. The digital ﬁlter runs on OC1, OC3, OC12, OC48, FC133, FC266, FC531, FC1063, FC2125Draft, Gigabit Ethernet, Inﬁniband 2.5Gb, 1394b, 393Mb, 786.4 3Mb, 1.572 Gb...
Page 318 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples enables the mask highlighthits function. MASK:HIGHLIGHTHITS ON might return , indicating MASK:HIGHLIGHTHITS? :MASK:HIGHLIGHTHITS 1 that the mask:highlighthits function is enabled. MASK:INVert This command controls whether the mask is drawn inverted. It has no effect if this mask cannot be inverted.
Page 319 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 turns off mask lock to waveform and any other value turns on mask <NR1> lock to waveform. Examples turns on mask lock to waveform. MASK:LOCK ON might return , indicating that the mask lock to MASK:LOCK? :MASK:LOCK 1 waveform mode is enabled.
Page 320 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 turns off mask margins; any other integer turns on the selected mask <NR1> margins. Examples turns on mask margins. MASK:MARGIN:STATE ON might return , indicating that MASK:MARGIN:STATE? :MASK:MARGIN:STATE 1 the mask margins are on. MASK:MASKPRE:AMPlitude This command sets or returns the current mask’s nominal pulse amplitude in volts.
Page 321 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle <NR3> MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle? Related Commands MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that sets the mask drawing timing resolution. <NR3> Examples sets the nominal timing resolution used to draw MASK:MASKPRE:HSCALE 40E-9 the mask pulse shape to 40 nanoseconds per division. might return , indicating MASK:MASKPRE:HSCALE?
Page 322 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS This command sets or returns the number of bits used for serial trigger for the User mask standard. For example, DS1 requires six bits: four leading zeros, a one, and a trailing zero. The query form of this command returns the serial bit value of the displayed mask.
Page 323 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the current mask number of bits before MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS 4 the trigger pulse to 4. might return MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS? :MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS , indicating that the presample bit value of the displayed mask is set to 8. MASK:MASKPRE:RECOrdlength This command sets or returns the nominal record length for pulse mask testing.
Page 324 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the ﬂoating point number that sets the time to the pulse bit sampling <NR3> position. Examples sets the current mask time from MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP 162E-9 the (leading edge) trigger position to the pulse bit sampling position to 162 nanoseconds.
Page 325 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS <NR3> MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS? Related Commands MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSet, MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that sets the nominal vertical position control <NR3> in divisions. Examples sets the current mask nominal vertical position MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS -0.8 to -0.8 divisions. might return MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS? :MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS 1.0000...
Page 326 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth This command sets or returns the nominal bit width in seconds. The query form of this command returns the bit width value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask. Group Mask Syntax...
Page 327 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order enables testing on positive pulses. This is the default. POSITIVe Examples sets pass/fail to test both positive (normal) and negative MASK:POLARITY BOTH (inverted) waveforms. might return , indicating that MASK:POLARITY? :MASK:POLARITY POSITIVE the input waveform polarity for the pass/fail test is set to positive. MASK:SEG<m>...
Page 328 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return MASK:SEG2:NR_PT? :MASK:SEG2:NR_PT 5 MASK:SEG<m>:POINTS This command sets or returns the X-Y user coordinates of all points in the current mask segment. The set form deﬁnes new points in the current mask, replacing any existing points in the current mask segment;...
Page 329 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments selects a channel waveform to be compared against the speciﬁed mask. CH<1-4> The range for is 1 through 4. selects a math waveform to be compared against the speciﬁed mask. MATH<1-4> The range for is 1 through 4. selects a reference waveform to be compared against the speciﬁed REF<1-4>...
Page 330 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order |FC1063E_AGR| FC1063E_AGT|FC1063E_NBT|FC1063E_NDT|FC1063E_NGT|FC133| FC133E|FC2125|FC2125E_ABR|FC2125E_ABT|FC2125E_ADR|FC2125E_ADT| FC2125E_AGR|FC2125E_AGT|FC2125E_NBT|FC2125E_NDT |FC2125E_NGT|FC266|FC266E|FC4250E_ABR|FC4250E_ABT |FC4250E_ADR|FC4250E_ADT|FC4250E_AGR |FC4250E_AGT|FC4250E_NBT|FC4250E_NDT |FC4250E_NGT|FC531|FC531E|FST1|FST2|FST3 |FST4|FST5|FST6|FW1394BS1600B| FW1394BS1600BT1|FW1394BS1600BT2|FW1394BS400B |FW1394BS400BT1| FW1394BS400BT2|FW1394BS800B|FW1394BS800BT1|FW1394BS800BT2| G703DS1|G703DS3|HST1|HST2|HST3|HST4|HST5|HST6|INF2_5G| INF2_5GE|NONe|OC1|OC12|OC3|OC48|OC48_FEC|PCIEXPRESS_Rcv| PCIEXPRESS_Xmit|RATE32Mbit|RATE97Mbit|RIO_DRV1G |RIO_DRV1_5G| RIO_DRV2G|RIO_DRV500M|RIO_DRV500M|RIO_DRV750M|RIO_EDRV1G| RIO_EDRV1_5G|RIO_EDRV2G|RIO_EDRV500M|RIO_EDRV500M| RIO_EDRV750M|RIO_RCV1G|RIO_RCV1_5G|RIO_RCV2G |RIO_RCV500M| RIO_RCV500M|RIO_RCV750M|RIO_SERIAL_1G |RIO_SERIAL_2G|RIO_SERIAL_3G| SFI5_RCVBCLK2|SFI5_RCVBCLK3|SFI5_RCVBDATA2 |SFI5_RCVBDATA3| SFI5_RCVDCLK2|SFI5_RCVDCLK3|SFI5_RCVDDATA2|SFI5_RCVDDATA3| SFI5_XMITACLK2|SFI5_XMITACLK3|SFI5_XMITADATA2|SFI5_XMITADATA3| SFI5_XMITCCLK2|SFI5_XMITCCLK3|SFI5_XMITCDATA2 |SFI5_XMITCDATA3| STM0_0|STM0_1|STM0_HDBX|STM1E_1|STM1E_0|STS1Eye |STS1Pulse| STS3|STS3_Max|TFI5_2|TFI5_3|USERMask|VIDEO270 |VIDEO292M|VIDEO360|VSROC192|SAS1_5_IR|SAS1_5_CR|SAS1_5_XR |SAS1_5_IR_AASJ|SAS1_5_CR_AASJ|SAS1_5_XR_AASJ |SAS1_5_SATA|SAS3_0_IR|SAS3_0_CR|SAS3_0_XR |SAS3_0_IR_AASJ|SAS3_0_CR_AASJ|SAS3_0_XR_AASJ |SAS3_0_SATA} MASK:STANdard? Related Commands ACQuire:MODe...
Page 331 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 64 kb/s) DS0Contra (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 64 kb/s) DS0Double (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 64 kb/s) DS0Single (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 64 kb/s) DS0Timing (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1, 1.544 Mb/s) (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1A, 2.048 Mb/s) DS1A (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1C, 3.152 Mb/s) DS1C...
Page 332 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Optical, 132.8 Mb/s) FC133 (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Electrical 132.8 Mb/s) FC133E (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Optical, 265.6 Mb/s) FC266 (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Electrical, 132.8 Mb/s) FC266E (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 11, Optical, 531.2 Mb/s) FC531...
Page 333 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 4.0, Abs, Beta, Transm) FC4250E_ABT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 4.0, Abs, Delta, Transm) FC4250E_ADT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 4.0, Abs, Gamma, FC4250E_AGT Transm) (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 4.0, Norm, Beta, Transm) FC4250E_NBT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev 4.0, Norm, Delta, FC4250E_NDT...
Page 334 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (USB, HS:T4, 480 Mb/s) HST4 (USB, HS:T5, 480 Mb/s) HST5 (USB, HS:T6, 480 Mb/s) HST6 (InﬁniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a, 2.5 Optical, 2.5 Gb/s) INF2_5G (InﬁniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a, 2.5 Electrical, 2.5 Gb/s) INF2_5GE NONe (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000 OC1/STM0, 51.84 Mb/s) (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000 OC1/STM1, 155.52, Mb/s) (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000 OC1/STM4, 622.08 Mb/s) OC12...
Page 335 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (Rapid IO Serial, 2.5 Gb/s) RIO_SERIAL_2G (Rapid IO Serial, 3.25 Gb/s) RIO_SERIAL_3G (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) SFI5_XMITADATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) SFI5_XMITCDATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) SFI5_XMITACLK2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s) SFI5_XMITCCLK2...
Page 336 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (VSR OC192/STM64, 1.24416 Gb/s) VSROC192 Examples selects the E1 Coax standard mask. MASK:STANDARD E1COAX might return , indicating that the MASK:STANDARD? :MASK:STANDARD E1COAX E1 Coax mask is selected as the current mask standard. MASK:STOPOnviolation This command sets or returns the stop on violation setting. When enabled, this command stops waveform acquisitions on the ﬁrst occurrence of a waveform violation.
Page 337 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments turns on the pass/fail mask:test:aux on completion. turns off the pass/fail mask:test:aux on completion. = 0 disables the mask:test:aux:completion function; any other value <NR1> enables it. Examples turns on the pass/fail test on completion. MASK:TEST:AUX:COMPLETION ON might return MASK:TEST:AUX:COMPLETION?
Page 338 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion {OFF|ON|<NR1>} MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion? Arguments turns on the pass/fail beep on completion. turns off the pass/fail beep on completion. = 0 turns off the pass/fail beep on completion, any other integer turns <NR1> on the pass/fail beep on completion. Examples turns on pas/fail beep on completion.
Page 339 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Mask Syntax MASK:TESt:DELay <NR3> MASK:TESt:DELay? Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that speciﬁes the amount of time, in seconds, <NR3> to delay the start of the pass/fail test. Examples delays waveform evaluation by 2.5 seconds after the MASK:TEST:DELAY 2.5 start of pass/fail testing.
Page 340 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure This command sets or returns the log status on pass/fail test failure mode. When enabled, this command causes the instrument to log the current date and time to a ﬁle when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. The ﬁle name is determined from the current date and time.
Page 341 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 turns off repeat on completion, and any other integer turns on repeat on <NR1> completion. Examples causes the instrument to continuously repeat the MASK:TEST:REPEAT ON pass/fail test. might return , indicating that MASK:TEST:REPEAT? :MASK:TEST:REPEAT ON the repeat pass/fail test on completion is turned on.
Page 342 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:TESt:SAMple:THReshold {<NR1>} MASK:TESt:SAMple:THReshold? Arguments is the number of hits that can happen when the test fails. <NR1> Examples sets the test to fail when 100 or more MASK:TEST:SAMPLE:THRESHOLD 100 hits happen. might return MASK:TEST:SAMPLE:THRESHOLD? :MASK:TEST:THRESHOLD , indicating that the repeat pass/fail test on completion is set to 1000 WfmDB 1000...
Page 343 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName This command sets or returns the name of the directory and ﬁle to use with the MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM command. It deﬁnes the directory the ﬁles will be put in (name comes from date and time). Group Mask Syntax...
Page 344 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples turns on pass/fail SRQ on completion. MASK:TEST:SRQ:COMPLETION ON might return MASK:TEST:SRQ:COMPLETION? :MASK:TEST:SRQ:COMPLETION , indicating that the pass/fail SRQ on completion is turned on. MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure This command sets or returns the SRQ status on pass/fail test failure mode. When enabled, this command causes the instrument to send a GPIB SRQ command when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’.
Page 345 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments turns on mask pass/fail testing. turns off mask pass/fail testing. = 0 turns off mask pass/fail testing; any other integer turns on mask <NR1> pass/fail testing. Examples turns on mask pass/fail testing. MASK:TEST:STATE ON might return , indicating that the MASK:TEST:STATE?
Page 346 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 turns off the pass/fail stop on failure, and any other integer turns on <NR1> the pass/fail SRQ on failure. Examples turns off the pass/fail stop on failure. MASK:TEST:STOP:FAILURE OFF might return , indicating MASK:TEST:STOP:FAILURE? :MASK:TEST:STATE 0 that the mask pass/fail testing is turned off.
Page 347 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:TESt:WAVEform <NR1> MASK:TESt:WAVEform? Arguments is an integer that sets the number of tested (sampled or averaged) <NR1> waveforms to test for each pass/fail test. Examples sets the number of failures that would cause a test MASK:TEST:WAVEFORM 20 failure to 20.
Page 348 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Mask Syntax MASK:USER:BITRate <NR1> MASK:USER:BITRate? Arguments is a number that sets the bit rate of the user mask in bits per second. <NR1> Examples sets the bit rate. MASK:USER:BITRATE 156E6 might return MASK:USER:BITRATE? :MASK:USER:BITRATE 1560000 indicating that the bit rate of the user mask is set to 1560000 bits per second.
Page 349 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order set form of this command only affects the user mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask. Group Mask Syntax MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS <NR3> MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS? Related Commands MASK:USER:HSCAle Arguments is a ﬂoating point number in the range of 0.0 to 1.0 that sets the trigger <NR3>...
Page 350 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS This command sets or returns the number of bits used for serial trigger for the User mask standard. For example, DS1 requires six bits, four leading zeros, a one, and a trailing zero. The query form of this command returns the serial bit value of the displayed mask.
Page 351 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the presample bit value of the displayed mask MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS 4 to 4. might return MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS? :MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS 0 indicating that the presample bit value of the displayed mask is set to 0. MASK:USER:RECOrdlength This command sets or returns the nominal record length for pulse mask testing. The query form of this command returns the record length value of the displayed mask.
Page 352 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MASK:USER:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the number of points that make up the speciﬁed user mask segment. Each mask point consists of a pair of X-Y coordinates. Group Mask Syntax MASK:USER:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? Arguments is an integer that speciﬁes a user mask segment number. <m>...
Page 353 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return MASK:USER:SEG2:POINTS? :MASK:USER:SEG2:POINTS , indicating that the X-Y user coordinates for user mask segment 0.0000 0.0000 2 in the selected mask is set to 0, 0. MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP This command sets or returns the time, in seconds, from the (leading edge) trigger position to the pulse bit sampling position.
Page 354 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that sets the nominal vertical offset in volts. <NR3> Examples sets the user mask nominal vertical offset to 0.0 volts. MASK:USER:VOFFSET 0.0 might return MASK:USER:VOFFSET? :MASK:USER:VOFFSET 0.0000 indicating that the nominal vertical offset value of the displayed mask is set to 0 volts.
Page 355 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MASK:USER:VSCAle <NR3> MASK:USER:VSCAle? Related Commands MASK:USER:VOFFSet, MASK:USER:VPOS Arguments is a ﬂoating point number that sets the nominal bit width in seconds. <NR3> Examples sets the user mask nominal vertical scale to MASK:USER:VSCALE 200E-3 200 millivolts per division. might return MASK:USER:VSCALE? :MASK:USER:VSCALE 1.0000E-3...
Page 356 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATHArbﬂt<x>:FILepath This command or query sets the ﬁle path for a ﬁle of ﬁlter coefﬁcients. Setting a path will read that ﬁle and load the ﬁlter for ARBFLT<x>, where x can be 1 to 4. Group Math Syntax...
Page 357 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Math Syntax MATHVAR? Related Commands MATHVAR:VAR<x>, MATH<x>:DEFine Returns <NR3> are the stored numerical values. Examples returns the values of all variables stored in locations 1 through 8. MATHVAR? MATHVAR:VAR<x> This command sets or queries one of 8 different numerical values you can use within math expressions.
Page 358 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH<x>? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the deﬁnition for the math waveform speciﬁed by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 4. Group Math Syntax MATH<x>? Related Commands SELect:<wfm> Examples might return the following deﬁnition of a math MATH1? waveform: :MATH1:DEFINE "Ch1-Ch2";UNITSTRING "V";...
Page 359 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Math Syntax MATH<x>:DEFine <QString> MATH<x>:DEFine? Related Commands MATHVAR:VAR<x> Arguments quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that deﬁnes <QString> the waveform. Examples adds the Channel 1 and Channel 2, storing the MATH2:DEFINE "CH1+CH2" results in Math 2 waveform. might return MATH1:DEFINE? as the expression that deﬁnes Math 1 waveform.
Page 360 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH<x>:FILTer:RISetime This command or query sets or returns the ﬁlter rise time parameter. Group Math Syntax MATH<x>:FILTer:RISetime <nr3> MATH<x>:FILTer:RISetime? Arguments <nr3> sets how the ﬁlter affects a signal. The bandwidth of the ﬁlter is approximately 0.35 / (ﬁlter rise time). For a square wave input, the measurement system rise time of Math(x) = ﬁlter (chx) is very close to the ﬁlter rise time of Math(x).
Page 361 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the label attached to a math waveform is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen. Channels are speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 4. This command is equivalent to selecting Math Label from the Math menu and entering a value in the X Position box.
Page 362 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the location (in divisions) where the label for the selected math <NR1> waveform is displayed, relative to the waveform handle. Arguments should rang from 10 to –10. Examples moves the waveform label for the Math 2 waveform MATH2:LABEL:YPOS -2.5 to 2.5 divisions below the waveform handle.
Page 363 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Math Syntax MATH<x>:SPECTral? Examples might return the spectral setup values for MATH1 MATH1:SPECTRAL? as follows: :MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB; PHASE DEGREES; GATEPOS 0.0000E+00; GATEWIDTH 1.9996E-06; REFLEVEL 4.4587+01; REFLEVELOFFSET2.2360E-01; SPAN 1.2500E+09; CENTER 6.2500E+08; RESBW 1.0002E=06; WINDOW GAUSSIAN; SUPPRESS -3.5000E+01;...
Page 364 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Math Syntax MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS <NR3> MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS? Related Commands MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH Arguments is the gate position. Units are represented in seconds, with respect to <NR3> trigger position. Examples speciﬁes the position of the edge of the gate MATH1:SPECTRAL:GATEPOS —2e8 used as the data input to the spectral analyzer.
Page 365 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk This command locks menus for two or more math waveforms together as a group. The query form of this command returns an ON (1) or OFF (0), indicating whether spectral locking is turned on. This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Control tab and then clicking the Time/Track Frequency Domain Controls button associated with the math waveforms that you want to lock.
Page 366 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG This command sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag function in the speciﬁed math deﬁnition string. The Math waveform is speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 4. This command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Mag from the Math menu and then entering the units that you want in the Scale box, or selecting Basic from the Math menu and then clicking the desired Scale button.
Page 367 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order sets the SpectralPhase units to groupdelay, which computes the GROUPDELAY derivative of unwrapped phase spectrum. Units are expressed in seconds. Examples sets the SpectralPhase units for Math 2 MATH2:SPECTRAL:PHASE DEGREES waveform to degrees. might return MATH2:SPECTRAL:PHASE? :MATH2:SPECTRAL:PHASE RADIANS indicating that the SpectralPhase units for Math 2 waveform are set to radians.
Page 368 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order spectral waveform to move vertically, with respect to zero dB. This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Mag tab and then entering a value in the Reference Level Offset box. Group Math Syntax...
Page 369 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH, MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER, MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN, MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow Arguments is the desired resolution bandwidth value. Units are represented in Hertz. <NR3> Examples sets the resolution bandwidth to the attainable MATH1:SPECTRAL:RESBW 250E3 value that is close to 250 kHz. might return MATH1:SPECTRAL:RESBW? :MATH1:SPECTRAL:RESBW...
Page 370 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress This command sets or returns the phase suppression threshold for the speciﬁed math waveform. The Math waveform is speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 4. This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Phase tab and then entering a value in the Suppression Threshold box.
Page 371 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments enables phase unwrap. disables phase wrap. = 0 disables phase wrap; any other value enables phase wrap. <NR1> Examples enables phase wrap of the spectral analyzer MATH1:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP ON output data. might return MATH1:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP? :MATH1:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP 0 indicating that the phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer output data is disabled.
Page 372 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order window function has the best localization characteristics in the joint GAUSSian time/frequency plane. window has an exponential nonsymmetrical shape in the time TEKEXPonential domain and a triangular shape in the frequency domain. window function is a cosine series window with a ﬂattened frequency FLATTOP2 response lobe.
Page 373 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order the signal after it is digitized. Note that if a signal that exceeds the range of the digitizer in one of these three scale ranges is repositioned, the displayed waveform will contain clipped values on-screen. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Math menu and then entering a Vert Pos value or adjusting the front panel Vertical POSITION knob.
Page 374 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the speciﬁed math waveform. The Math waveform is speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 4. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Math menu and then entering a Vert Scale value or adjusting the front panel Vertical SCALE knob.
Page 375 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement? (Query Only) This query-only command returns all measurement parameters in the following order: MEAS1, MEAS2, MEAS3, MEAS4, MEAS5, MEAS6, MEAS7, MEAS8, and IMMED. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement? Examples might return MEASUREMENT? :MEASUREMENT:GATING OFF;IMMED:TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD...
Page 376 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments = 0 disables immediate state measurement annotation, any other value enables immediate state measurements. disables annotation on immediate state measurements. enables annotation on immediate state measurements. Examples enables annotation of immediate MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATION:IMMEDSTATE ON measurements. ? might return MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATION:IMMEDSTATE , indicating that...
Page 377 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:ANNOTation:STATE This command sets or returns the state of visible measurement annotations. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:ANNOTation:STATE {OFF|MEAS1|MEAS2|MEAS3|MEAS4|MEAS5|MEAS6|MEAS7|MEAS8} MEASUrement:ANNOTation:STATE? Arguments turns off visible measurement annotations. turns on the display of visible measurement annotations for measurement MEAS<x> <x>, where <x>...
Page 378 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATION:TYPE? , indicating that standard :MEASUREMENT:ANNOTATION:TYPE STANDARD annotations will be displayed. MEASUrement:ANNOTation:X<x>? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the value of the speciﬁed X annotation. X annotations are numbered, in general, from top to bottom on the display. The value of <x>...
Page 379 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MEASUrement:GATing {ON|OFF|<NR1>|ZOOM<x>|CURSor} MEASUrement:GATing? Arguments turns on measurement gating. turns off measurement gating. = 0 turns off measurement gating; any other value turns on measurement <NR1> gating. turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the zoom box. <x> ZOOM<x>...
Page 380 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? (Query Only) This query-only command returns information about the immediate delay measurement. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab and then clicking the Delay button. Group Measurement Syntax...
Page 381 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order that searching begins at the end of the waveform record and looks for the last rising or falling edge. MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1] This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay “from”...
Page 382 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 {FALL|RISe} MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2? Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x> Arguments speciﬁes the falling edge. FALL speciﬁes the rising edge. RISe Examples speciﬁes that the rising edge be MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE used for the immediate delay measurement. might return MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2? , indicating that the falling edge or...
Page 383 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe This command sets or queries whether the noise measurement is made on the high or low level of the waveform. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Ref Levs > Eye > Top Level or Base Level in the Comm tab of the Measurement Setup dialog box.
Page 384 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the upper reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of rise and fall measurements. NOTE. This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements.
Page 385 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod Arguments is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V. <NR3> Examples sets the low reference MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0 level to 0.0 V. might return MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW? , indicating :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0000E+00 that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.
Page 386 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod This command speciﬁes or queries the reference level units used for measurement calculations. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired reference level from the Units group box.
Page 387 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR1> MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH? Related Commands MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod Arguments is the high reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default high <NR1> reference level is 90%. Examples sets the high reference MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 95 level to 95% of HIGH. might return MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH? , indicating that the...
Page 388 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW? , indicating that the :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10 percentage low reference level is set to 10% of HIGH. MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x> This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to HIGH) used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel: METHod is set to Percent.
Page 389 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x> {CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>|HIStogram} MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>? Arguments is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an CH<x> integer ranging from 1 through 4. is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer MATH<y>...
Page 390 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples selects Pulse as the signal MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE type for source 1. might return MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE<X>:SIGTYPE? indicating that the signal :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE EYE type for source 1 is EYE. MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe This command sets or queries the immediate measurement type. Measurement Group Syntax...
Page 391 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (cycle rms) measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the ﬁrst cycle CRMs in the waveform or the ﬁrst cycle in the gated region. measures the time between the middle reference (default = 50%) amplitude DELay point of the source waveform and the destination waveform.
Page 392 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (histogram hits) measures the number of points in or on the histogram box. HITs measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes called Baseline) of a waveform. ﬁnds the maximum amplitude. This value is the most positive peak MAXimum voltage found.
Page 393 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Crossing percent = 100 ×[(eye-crossing-point - PBASe)/(PTOP - PBASe)] (positive duty cycle) is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal PDUty period, expressed as a percentage. It is measured on the ﬁrst cycle in the waveform or gated region.
Page 394 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order measures the Root Mean Square noise amplitude on a waveform at RMSNoise the mid reference level. (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in the SIGMA1 histogram that are within one standard deviation of the histogram mean. (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in the SIGMA2 histogram that are within two standard deviations of the histogram mean.
Page 395 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the value of the measurement speciﬁed by the MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe command. The measurement is immediately taken on the source(s) speciﬁed by a MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x> command. NOTE. A change to CH<x>:SCALe will not necessarily have taken affect it followed by this command.
Page 396 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:METHOD HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH. MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the number of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Some values may have been ignored because they generated an error. Measurements are speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Page 397 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction {BACKWards|FORWards} MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction? Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x> Arguments means that the search starts at the end of the waveform BACKWards and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x>...
Page 398 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the falling edge of the waveform. FALL speciﬁes the rising edge of the waveform. RISE Examples speciﬁes that the rising edge of the MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE waveform be used for measurement 3. might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2? , indicating that the falling edge :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2 FALL...
Page 399 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:METHod This command speciﬁes or queries the method used to calculate the 0% and 100% reference level. Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:METHod {HIStogram|MINMax|MEAN} MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:METHod? Arguments sets the high and low waveform levels statistically using a histogram HIStogram algorithm.
Page 400 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order or optical measurement deﬁned. Measurements are speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Conditions This command is only valid if the instrument has Option MTM is installed. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:NOISe {HIGH|LOW} MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:NOISe? Arguments argument causes the measurement for noise to be taken at the high level HIGH...
Page 401 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the upper reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Measurements are speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. NOTE. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements Measurement Group Syntax...
Page 402 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V. <NR3> Examples sets the low MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0 V reference level to 0.0 V. might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW? , indicating :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0000E+00 that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V. MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x>...
Page 403 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measure menu and then choosing the desired reference level from the Units group box. Measurements are speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod {ABSolute|PERCent} MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod? Arguments speciﬁes that the reference levels are set explicitly using the ABSolute commands.
Page 404 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the high reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default high <NR3> reference level is 90%. Examples sets the high reference MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 95 level to 95% of HIGH. might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH? , indicating that the :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90 percentage high reference level is set to 90% of HIGH.
Page 405 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Mid1 speciﬁes the “from” waveform and Mid2 speciﬁes the “to” waveform for delay measurements. Measurements are speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. NOTE. This command affects the results of delay measurements. Group Measurement Syntax...
Page 406 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Arguments is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an CH<x> integer ranging from 1 through 4. is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer MATH<y>...
Page 407 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE? , indicating that the :MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE EYE signal type associated with source 1 of measurement slot 2 is EYE. MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE This command sets or queries whether the speciﬁed measurement slot is computed and displayed. The measurement slot is speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Page 408 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev? Examples might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV? :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV 21.0E-12. MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe This command sets or queries the measurement type deﬁned for the speciﬁed measurement slot. The measurement slot is speciﬁed by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Page 409 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (cycle mean) measures the arithmetic mean over the ﬁrst cycle in the CMEan waveform or the ﬁrst cycle in the gated region. (cycle rms) measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the ﬁrst cycle CRMs in the waveform or the ﬁrst cycle in the gated region.
Page 410 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order You can also limit the High measurement (normally taken over the entire waveform record) to a gated region on the waveform. (histogram hits) measures the number of points in or on the histogram box. HITs measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes called Baseline) of a waveform.
Page 411 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order measures the location of the eye crossing point expressed as a PCTCROss percentage of EYEHeight. Crossing percent = 100 ×[(eye-crossing-point - PBASe)/(PTOP - PBASe)] (positive duty cycle) is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal PDUty period, expressed as a percentage.
Page 412 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order measures the variance in the time locations of the cross point. The RMSJitter RMS jitter is deﬁned as one standard deviation at the cross point. measures the Root Mean Square noise amplitude on a waveform at RMSNoise the mid reference level.
Page 413 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNITS? :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNIts % indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent. MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the value that has been calculated for the measurement speciﬁed by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Statistics from the Measure menu and then choosing Value from the drop-down list to display all measurement values on-screen.
Page 414 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH, MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent: LOW, MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x>, Arguments sets the high and low reference levels to the most common values HIStogram either above or below the mid point, depending on whether the high reference point or the low reference point is being deﬁned. Because the statistical approach ignores short-term aberrations, such as overshoot or ringing, the histogram method is the best setting for examining pulses.
Page 415 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples causes the noise measurement to be made at the MEASUREMENT:NOISE HIGH high level of the waveform. might return , indicating MEASUREMENT:NOISE? :MEASUREMENT:NOISE LOW that the noise measurement will be made at the low level of the waveform. MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the upper reference level when...
Page 416 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Absolute Low Ref value. NOTE. this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements. To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Page 417 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x> <NR3> MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x>? Related Commands MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod Arguments is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V. <NR3> Examples sets the mid reference level MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5 for the delay waveform to 0.5 V. might return MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2? , indicating that the...
Page 418 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD? , indicating that the reference :MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT level units used are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW. MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal to HIGH) that is used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent.
Page 419 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. This command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements. To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands. Measurement Group Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW <NR3> MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW? Related Commands MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe Arguments...
Page 420 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x> <NR3> MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x>? Related Commands MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod Arguments is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default mid <NR3> reference level is 50%. Examples sets the mid2 reference level MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 40 to 40% of HIGH. might return MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2? , indicating that the...
Page 421 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt (No Query Form) This command (no query form) clears existing measurement statistics from memory. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, selecting Statistics, and clicking the Reset button. Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt {RESET}...
Page 422 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order turns on statistics and displays the mean and standard deviation MEANSTDdev of each measurement. Examples turns off statistic measurements. MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE OFF might return MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE? , indicating that measurement statistics :MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE ALL are turned on and all statistics are being displayed for each measurement. MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting This command sets or queries the time constant for mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations.
Page 423 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax NEWpass <QString> Related Commands PASSWord, *PUD Arguments is the new password, which can contain up to 10 characters. <QString> Examples creates a new password (mypassword) for accessing NEWPASS "mypassword" your protected data. *OPC This command generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.
Page 424 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of *OPC all pending OPC operations. might return 1 to indicate that all pending OPC operations are ﬁnished. *OPC? *OPT? (Query Only) This query-only command returns a list of the options installed in your instrument. Group Status and Error Syntax...
Page 425 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order *PSC This command sets and queries the power-on status ﬂag that controls the automatic power-on handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When *PSC is true, the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power-on.
Page 426 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands PASSWord Arguments is a block containing up to 100 characters. <Block> is a string containing up to 100 characters. <QString> Examples stores the string “This *PUD #229This instrument belongs to me instrument belongs to me” in the user protected data area. might return *PUD? #221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X...
Page 427 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands SAVe:MASK Arguments is a quoted string that deﬁnes the ﬁle name and path from where the <QString> mask will be recalled. Input the ﬁle path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<ﬁlename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will read the mask from the default directory.
Page 428 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples recalls (and makes current) the instrument setup to its RECALL:SETUP FACTORY factory defaults. recalls the instrument setup from setup storage location 2. RECALL:SETUP 2 recalls the setup from the ﬁle TEK00000.SET RECALL:SETUP "TEK00000.SET" in the default directory for setups (C:\TekScope\setups). RECAll:SETUp:DESKew This command sets or queries the deskew values that are affected by a default setup or a recalled setup.
Page 429 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax RECAll:WAVEform <file path>,REF<x> Related Commands DELEte:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform Arguments speciﬁes a location in internal reference memory. Reference memory REF<x> location values range from 1 through 4. speciﬁes a location for a stored waveform ﬁle. <ﬁle path> is a <file path>...
Page 430 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION? :REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION , indicating that the Reference 1 waveform is centered on the horizontal graticule. REF<x>:LABel? (Query Only) This query-only command returns a branch query containing the waveform label name and the coordinates at which the label (attached to the displayed waveform of the speciﬁed reference) is displayed.
Page 431 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the character string that will be used for the reference waveform <QString> label name. Examples sets the label name of Reference 4 REF4:LABEL:NAME "My Reference" waveform to “My Reference”. might return , indicating REF3:LABEL:NAME? :REF3:LABEL:NAME "Signal2"...
Page 432 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order can range from 1 through 4. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu, choosing Label from the drop-down list, selecting the tab associated with the reference for which you want to position a label, and entering a value in the Y Position box.
Page 433 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax REF<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3> REF<x>:VERTical:POSition? Related Commands CH<x>:POSition, MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition Arguments is the desired position, control in divisions from the center horizontal <NR3> graticule. The range is from -5 to 5 divisions. Examples positions the Reference 2 waveform REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION 1.3E+00 input signal 1.3 divisions above the center horizontal graticule.
Page 434 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3> REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle? Related Commands CH<x>:SCAle, MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle Arguments is the gain in user units per division. <NR3> Examples sets the Reference 4 waveform scale to REF4:VERTICAL:SCALE 100E-03 100 mV per division. might return REF4:VERTICAL:SCALE? :REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE , indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 1.0000e+00...
Page 435 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Miscellaneous Syntax ROSc:SOUrce {INTERnal|EXTernal} ROSc:SOUrce {INTERnal|EXTernal|TEKLink} ROSc:SOUrce? Related Commands ROSc:STATE? Arguments speciﬁes the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as the time base INTERnal reference. speciﬁes the user-supplied external signal as the time base reference. EXTernal speciﬁes the TekLink signal as the time base reference.
Page 436 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command is also useful for synchronizing multiple instruments. Group Miscellaneous Syntax ROSc:TRACking {STABle|FAST} ROSc:TRACking? Arguments tracking mode speciﬁes that the external reference signal is fed through a STABle phase-locked loop that removes jitter from the external reference. tracking mode speciﬁes that the external reference signal bypasses the FAST phase-locked loop.
Page 437 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax *RST Related Commands FACtory, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp Arguments None Examples resets the instrument settings to factory defaults. *RST *SAV (No Query Form) This command (no query form) stores the state of the instrument to a speciﬁed memory location.
Page 438 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands RECAll:MASK Arguments is the location to where the mask is stored. <ﬁle path> is a quoted <QString> string that deﬁnes the ﬁle name and path. Input the ﬁle path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<ﬁlename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. The ﬁle is stored in ASCII format and is user-editable.
Page 439 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SAVe:WAVEform (No Query Form) This command (no query form) saves a waveform to one of four reference memory locations or a ﬁle. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu and choosing Save Wfm from the drop-down list. Group Save and Recall Syntax...
Page 440 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu, clicking the Waveform button, and choosing the desired waveform ﬁle format from the Save as type drop-down list. Group Save and Recall Syntax SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat {INTERNal|MATHCad|MATLab|SPREADSHEETCsv| SPREADSHEETTxt|TIMEStamp}...
Page 441 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes that the internal ﬁle format SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL is the format used for saving waveforms. might return SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT? :SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT , indicating that waveforms are saved using the internal format. INTERNAL *SDS (No Query Form) This command (no query form) changes the speciﬁed setup to reference the factory setup instead of the speciﬁc user setup slot.
Page 442 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy (No Query Form) This command (no query form) copies the search criteria to the trigger, the trigger criteria to a search, or copy search to search. <x> is the search number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy {SEARCHtotrigger|TRIGgertosearch|FROMSearch<x>}...
Page 443 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the total number of matches for the search. The total number of matches may be more than the number of marks placed. <x> is the search number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?
Page 444 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory: AUTOReflevel{AUTO|CUSTom} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:AUTOReflevel? Arguments sets the reference levels to auto. When auto is selected, the instrument AUTO determines the reference level from the applied signal. sets the reference levels to custom. When custom is selected, you set CUSTom the reference level Examples...
Page 445 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:CSActive This command sets or queries whether the expected chip-select will be an active HIGH or LOW. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:CSActive {HIGH|LOW} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:CSActive? Arguments sets the search to look for an active HIGH. HIGH sets the search to look for an active HIGH.
Page 446 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:CSMode This command sets or queries the chip-select mode for DDR memory searches. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:CSMode {AUTO|MANual} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:CSMode? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:CSLevel Arguments mode calculates the chip-select level for you. AUTO lets you manually set the chip-select level. MANUAL Examples sets the...
Page 447 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the chip SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:CSSOURCE REF1 select source for DDR memory searches to reference 1. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:CSSOURCE? indicating the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:CSSOURCE CH1 chip select source for DDR memory searches is channel 1. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:DATASource This command sets or queries the data source for a DDR Memory analysis search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 448 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the hysterisis amount in percent. <NR3> Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:HYSTERISIS 0.10 hysterisis for DDR memory searches to 0.10 percent. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:HYSTERISIS? indicating SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:HYSTERISIS 1.0000 the hysterisis for DDR memory searches is set to 1.0 percent. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:MARgin This command sets or queries the termination logic margin for back-to-back writes.
Page 449 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:MAXCAS 2.0000 MAXCas 2.0 clock periods to the left of the start of the mark. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:MAXCAS? indicating SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:MAXCAS 3.0000 is set to 3.0 clock periods to the left of the mark. MAXCas SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:MINCas This command sets or queries the minimum distance, in clock periods, to the left...
Page 450 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the value of the data HIGH reference level in volts. <NRF> Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:REFLEVEL:DATA:HIGH 1 the data HIGH reference level to 1.0 volt. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:REFLEVEL:DATA:HIGH? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:REFLEVEL:DATA:HIGH , indicating that the data HIGH reference level is set to 0 volt. 0.0000 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:REFLevel:DATA:LOW This command sets or queries the value of the data LOW reference level for a...
Page 451 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:REFLevel:DATA:MID <NRF> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:REFLevel:DATA:MID? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:AUTOReflevel Arguments speciﬁes the value of the data MID reference level in volts. <NRF> Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:REFLEVEL:DATA:MID 1.5 the data MID reference level to 1.5 volts. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:REFLEVEL:DATA:MID? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:REFLEVEL:DATA:MID , indicating that the data MID reference level is set to 1.0 volt.
Page 452 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:REFLevel:STROBE:LOW This command sets or queries the value of the strobe LOW reference level for a DDR Memory analysis search to determine where to place a mark. You can set the value only when AUTOREFLEVEL is Custom. <x> is the search number. Group Search and Mark Syntax...
Page 453 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:REFLEVEL:STROBE:MID 3 the strobe MID reference level to 3.0 volts. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:REFLEVEL:STROBE:MID? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:DDRMEMORY:REFLEVEL:STROBE:MID , indicating that the strobe MID reference level is set to 0 volt. 0.0000 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:STANdard This command sets or queries the DDR standard for a DDR Memory analysis search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 454 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory:STROBEsource? Arguments speciﬁes the input channel as the search source, where <x> is the channel CH<x> number. speciﬁes the math waveform as the search source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 MATH<x> or 4. speciﬁes the reference waveform as the search source, where <x> = REF<x>...
Page 455 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe:MATH<x> This command sets or queries the slope for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or the math waveform number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe:MATH<x>...
Page 456 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the Reference 2 SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE:REF2 RISE waveform slope for search 1 to rise. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE:REF1? , indicating that the :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE:REF1 FALL slope for the Reference 1 waveform trigger for search 1 is the falling edge. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce This command sets or queries the source waveform for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 457 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:GLItch:POLarity:CH<x>? Arguments speciﬁes positive or negative polarity. EITher speciﬁes a negative polarity. NEGAtive speciﬁes a positive glitch polarity. POSITIVe Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:GLITCH:POLARITY:CH2 NEGATIVE speciﬁes that the Channel 2 glitch polarity must be negative for search 1. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:GLITCH:POLARITY:CH1? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:GLITCH:POLARITY:CH1 NEGATIVE...
Page 458 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:GLItch:POLarity:REF<x> {EITher|NEGAtive|POSITIVe} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:GLItch:POLarity:REF<x>? Arguments speciﬁes positive or negative polarity. EITher speciﬁes a negative polarity. NEGAtive speciﬁes a positive glitch polarity. POSITIVe Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:GLITCH:POLARITY:REF2 NEGATIVE speciﬁes that the Reference 2 waveform glitch polarity must be negative for search 1.
Page 459 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:GLItch:WIDth This command sets or queries the glitch width for a glitch trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:GLItch:WIDth <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:GLItch:WIDth? Arguments speciﬁes the glitch width in seconds.
Page 460 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH<x> This command sets or queries the math waveform level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or math waveform number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LEVel:MATH<x>...
Page 461 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF1? , indicating that :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:REF1 200.0000E-3 the Reference 1 waveform trigger level for search 1 is set to 200 mV. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion This command sets or queries the logic operator for a pattern or state trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 462 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes a “don’t care” state. Examples sets the logic input SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 HIGH for Channel 1 to HIGH. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1? , indicating the logic :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 LOW input on Channel 1 for search 1 is set to LOW. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:MATH<x>...
Page 463 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:REF<x> {HIGH|LOW|X} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:REF<x>? Arguments speciﬁes a high logic level. HIGH speciﬁes a low logic level. speciﬁes a “don’t care” condition. Examples sets the Reference SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF2 HIGH 2 waveform logic input for search 1 to HIGH. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:REF1? , indicating the...
Page 464 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:MATH<x> <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:MATH<x>? Arguments speciﬁes the threshold level in volts. <NR3> Examples 0 sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:MATH2 2. Math 2 waveform logic trigger threshold for search 1 to 2.0 Volts. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:MATH1? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:MATH1 1.4000 indicating the Math 1 waveform logic threshold for search 1 is set to 1.4 Volts.
Page 465 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PATtern:WHEn {TRUe|FALSe|LESSThan|MOREThan} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PATtern:WHEn? Related Commands SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit, SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit Arguments speciﬁes a TRUE logic level. TRUe speciﬁes a FALSE logic level. FALSe speciﬁes the pattern must be TRUE less than the time limit. LESSThan speciﬁes the pattern must be TRUE more than the time limit.
Page 466 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT 1.0000E-9 indicating the lesslimit time is set to 1 ns. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit This command sets or queries the time the pattern trigger morelimit test uses to determines where to place a mark. is the search number.
Page 467 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes one input channel as the edge source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 or 4. CH<x> speciﬁes the math waveform as the search source, where <x> = 1, 2, 3 MATH<x> or 4. speciﬁes the reference waveform as the search source, where <x>...
Page 468 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity:MATH<x> This command sets or queries the polarity setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or math waveform number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:POLarity:MATH<x>...
Page 469 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments places a mark when the rising edge crosses the low threshold and POSitive the falling edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high threshold. places a mark when the falling edge crosses the high threshold and NEGative the rising edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold.
Page 470 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH:MATH<x> <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH:MATH<x>? Arguments speciﬁes the HIGH threshold level. <NR3> Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH:MATH2 1.3 runt trigger HIGH threshold to 1.3 Volts. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH:MATH1? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH:MATH1 , indicating that the Math 1 waveform runt trigger HIGH threshold is set 2.0000 to 2.0 Volts.
Page 471 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW:CH<x> <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW:CH<x>? Arguments speciﬁes the LOW threshold in volts. <NR3> Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW:CH2 0.10 Channel 2 LOW runt trigger threshold for search 1 to 100 mV. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW:CH1? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW:CH1 800.0000E-3 indicating the Channel 1 runt trigger LOW threshold for search 1 is set to 800 mV.
Page 472 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW:REF<x> <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:THReshold:LOW:REF<x>? Arguments speciﬁes the LOW threshold in volts. <NR3> Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW:REF2 0.10 Reference 2 waveform runt trigger LOW threshold for search 1 to 100 mV. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW:REF1? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW:REF1...
Page 473 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth This command sets or queries the width setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT:WIDth? Arguments speciﬁes the minimum width, in seconds.
Page 474 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce This command sets or queries the clock source setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|MATH1|MATH2|MATH3|MATH4|REF1|REF2|REF3|REF4} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes an input channel as the edge source, where <x>...
Page 475 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD:CH2 ECL the Channel 2 setup/hold trigger clock threshold setting for search 1 to ECL. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD:CH1? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD:CH1 , indicating that the Channel 1 setup/hold trigger clock threshold setting –1.3000 for search 1 is set to -1.3 volts. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold:MATH<x>...
Page 476 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold:REF<x> {NR3|ECL|TTL} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold:REF<x>? Arguments is the clock level, in volts. <NR3> speciﬁes a preset high level of -1.3 V. speciﬁes a preset high level of 1.4 V. Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD:REF2 ECL sets the clock threshold setting of the Reference 2 waveform for a setup/hold trigger search to ECL.
Page 477 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold:CH<x> This command sets or queries the data threshold setting for a setup/hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or channel number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:DATa:THReshold:CH<x>...
Page 478 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD:MATH1 ECL sets the Math 2 waveform setup/hold trigger data threshold setting for search 1 to -1.3 volts. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD:MATH1? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD:MATH1 , indicating that the Math 1 waveform setup/hold trigger data threshold 1.0000 setting for search 1 is set to 1.0 volt.
Page 479 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold:HOLDTime? Arguments speciﬁes the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time <NR3> occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge. Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME? 400E-12 setup/hold trigger hold time setting for search 1 to 400 ps.
Page 480 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes polarity as the clock falling edge. FALL speciﬁes polarity as the clock rising edge. RISe Examples sets the state SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:STATE:CLOCk:EDGE? RISE trigger clock slope polarity setting for search 1 to RISE. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:STATE:CLOCk:EDGE? , indicating that :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:STATE:CLOCk:EDGE FALL...
Page 481 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE:WHEn {TRUe|FALSe} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE:WHEn? Arguments speciﬁes a TRUE logic level. TRUe speciﬁes a FALSE logic level. FALSe Examples sets the state trigger logic SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:STATE:WHEN FALSE level for search 1 to FALSE. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:STATE:WHEN? , indicating that the state :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:STATE:WHEN TRUE trigger logic level for search 1 is set to TRUE.
Page 482 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity:MATH<x> {STAYSHigh|STAYSLow|EITher} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:POLarity:MATH<x>? Arguments speciﬁes the polarity stays HIGH. STAYSHigh speciﬁes the polarity stays LOW. STAYSLow speciﬁes the polarity either stays HIGH or stays LOW. EITher Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TIMEOUT:POLARITY:MATH2 STAYSLOW the Math 2 waveform timeout trigger polarity for search 1 to STAYSLOW.
Page 483 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe This command sets or queries the time setting for a timeout trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:TIMe? Arguments is the time in seconds.
Page 484 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity:CH<x> This command sets or queries the polarity setting for a transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or channel number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity:CH<x> {EITher|NEGAtive|POSITIVe} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:POLarity:CH<x>? Arguments...
Page 485 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes either positive or negative polarity. EITher Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY:MATH2 NEGATIVE sets the Math 2 waveform transition trigger polarity setting for search 1 to NEGATIVE. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY:MATH1? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:POLARITY:MATH1 , indicating that the Math 1 waveform transition trigger polarity setting POSITIVE for search 1 is set to POSITIVE.
Page 486 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH:CH<x> This command sets or queries the threshold high voltage level setting for a transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or channel number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH:CH<x>...
Page 487 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH:MATH1? might return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH:MATH1 , indicating that the Math 1 waveform transition trigger HIGH threshold 2.0000 setting for search 1 is set to 2 volts. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH:REF<x> This command sets or queries the threshold high voltage level setting for a transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 488 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the LOW threshold in volts. <NR3> Examples sets SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW:CH2 0.5 the Channel 2 transition trigger LOW threshold setting for search 1 to 0.5 volts. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW:CH1? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW:CH1 , indicating that the Channel 1 transition trigger LOW threshold 800.0000E–3 setting for search 1 is set to 0.8 volts.
Page 489 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW:REF<x> <NR3> SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW:REF<x>? Arguments speciﬁes the LOW threshold in volts. <NR3> Examples SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW:REF2 0.5 sets the Reference 2 waveform transition trigger LOW threshold setting for search 1 to 0.5 volts. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW:REF1? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW:REF1 , indicating that the Reference 1 waveform transition trigger LOW 800.0000E–3 threshold setting for search 1 is set to 0.8 volts.
Page 490 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe {EDGE|RUNT|TRANsition|PATtern|GLItch|SETHold|UNDEFINED| WIDth|TIMEOut|WINdow|STATE|DDRRead|DDRWrite|DDRREADWrite} SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TYPe? Arguments triggers when the source input signal amplitude crosses the speciﬁed level EDGE in the direction given by the slope. NOTE. EDGE is standard. All other arguments are optional. triggers when a pulse crosses the ﬁrst preset voltage threshold but RUNT does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the ﬁrst.
Page 491 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the trigger type setting for SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE RUNT search 1 to RUNT. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE? , indicating that the trigger type :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:TYPE EDGE setting for search 1 is set to EDGE. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WIDth:HIGHLimit This command sets or queries the upper time limit setting for a width trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 492 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 500.0000E-12 indicating that the width trigger lower time limit setting for search 1 is set to 0.5 ns. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WIDth:POLarity:CH<x> This command sets or queries the polarity for a width trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 493 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:POLARITY:MATH2 NEGATIVE Math 2 waveform width trigger polarity setting for search 1 to NEGATIVE. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:POLARITY:MATH1? :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:POLARITY:MATH1 POSITIVE indicating that the Math 1 waveform width trigger polarity setting for search 1 is set to POSITIVE. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WIDth:POLarity:REF<x>...
Page 494 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the outside limits. OUTside speciﬁes the inside limits. WIThin Examples sets the width trigger SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:WHEN OUTSIDE for search 1 to outside limits. might return SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:WHEN? , indicating that the :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WIDTH:WHEN WITHIN width trigger for search 1 is set to inside limits. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:EVENT This command sets or queries the window trigger search to determine where to place a mark.
Page 495 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH:CH<x> This command sets or queries the channel threshold HIGH level for a window trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or channel number. Group Search and Mark Syntax SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH:CH<x>...
Page 496 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order , indicating that the Math 1 waveform window trigger high threshold level 2.0000 for search 1 is set to 2.0 volts. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH:REF<x> This command sets or queries the reference waveform threshold HIGH level for a window trigger search to determine where to place a mark. <x> is the search number or reference waveform number.
Page 497 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW:CH2 0.5 Channel 2 window trigger low threshold level for search 1 to 0.5 volts. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW:CH1? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW:CH1 , indicating that the Channel 1 window trigger high threshold level 800.0000E-3 for search 1 is set to 0.8 volts. SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow:THReshold:LOW:MATH<x>...
Page 498 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the LOW threshold level. <NR3> Examples sets the SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW:REF2 0.5 Reference 2 waveform window trigger low threshold level for search 1 to 0.5 volts. might SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW:REF1? return :SEARCH:SEARCH1:TRIGGER:A:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW:REF1 , indicating that the Reference 1 waveform window trigger low threshold 2.0000 level for search 1 is set to 0.8 volts.
Page 499 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments any numerical nonzero, stops the acquisition. <NR1> continues the acquisition. stops the acquisition. stops the acquisition. continues the acquisition. Examples stops the acquisition. SEARCH:STOP 1 might return , indicating that a search found SEARCH:STOP? :SEARCH:STOP 1 an event and stops acquisition.
Page 500 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order turns off the display of the speciﬁed channel waveform; any other <NR1> = 0 value turns on the display of the speciﬁed waveform. Examples displays Channel 1. SELECT:CH1 ON might return SELECT:CH1 1 indicating Channel 1 is displayed. SELECT:CH1? SELect:CONTROl <wfm>...
Page 501 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax SELect:<wfm> {ON|OFF|<NR1>} SELect:<wfm>? Arguments turns on the display of the speciﬁed waveform. This waveform also becomes the selected waveform. turns off the display of the speciﬁed waveform. = 0 turns off the display of the speciﬁed waveform; any other value turns <NR1>...
Page 502 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTRUNNING;:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE FALLING;:CMDBATCH 1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE NORMAL;MATHCOLOR DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT;:DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT YT;GRATICULE FULL;INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 75.0000;AUTOBRIGHT 1;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF;STYLE VECTORS;TRIGBAR SHORT;TRIGT 1;VARPERSIST 500.0000E-3;:HARDCOPY:FILENAME "untitled";PORT FILE;:DIAG:LEVEL SUBSYS;:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL;:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME 1.5000E-6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE; SETUp:NAMe This command allows you to create (or query) a name for your saved setups.
Page 503 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order *SRE The *SRE (Service Request Enable) command sets and queries the bits in the Service Request Enable Register. For more information, refer to Registers. Group Status and Error Syntax *SRE <NR1> *SRE? Related Commands *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, FACtory, *STB? Arguments is a value in the range from 0 through 255.
Page 504 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TEKLink:CONNection? (Query Only) This command returns the current TekLink network connection. Group TekLink Syntax TEKLink:CONNection? Returns when two instruments are connected through a TekLink cable. INSTRUMENT when two or more instruments are connected to a hub through a TekLink cable.
Page 505 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TEKSecure (No Query Form) This command initializes both waveform and setup memories, overwriting any previously stored data. TEKSecure deletes all four waveform reference memory slots on the hard drive, if they exist, and puts all setups in the factory-initialized state. External setups that are stored on the hard drive are not affected.
Page 506 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order executes a speciﬁc Acquisition Memory test TEST "113" (Subsystem:Acquisition, Area:Memory, Test:Address Lines). TEST:RESults? (Query Only) This query-only command returns an abbreviated status about the results of the last TEST execution. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Page 507 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TEST:STOP (No Query Form) This command (no query form) causes test (or diagnostics) execution to terminate at the end of the next low-level test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then clicking Abort. Group Diagnostics Syntax...
Page 508 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order *TRG (No Query Form) This command (no query form) performs the group execute trigger on commands deﬁned by *DDT. Group Miscellaneous Syntax *TRG Related Commands *DDT Examples immediately executes all commands that have been deﬁned by *DDT. *TRG TRIGger This command forces a trigger event to occur.
Page 509 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 1.2000;SOURCE CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-9;SETTIME 3.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE INSIDE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E-9;LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN FASTERTHAN;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY...
Page 510 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?, TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE: COUPling, TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe, TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:B:STATE Examples might return TRIGGER:A:EDGE? :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING , indicating the trigger source, coupling, and slope for the A DC; SLOPE RISE edge trigger. TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the edge trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Event Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Edge Trigger, and choosing from the Coupling drop-down list.
Page 511 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling:CH<x> This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the A or B trigger for the speciﬁed channel. This command is equivalent to selecting A or B Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the setting from the Coupling drop-down list. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 512 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal. RISe speciﬁes to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal. FALL speciﬁed to trigger on either the rising or falling edge of a signal. EITHER Examples sets the A edge trigger slope to positive, which...
Page 513 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe:CH<x> {RISe|FALL|EITher} TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SLOpe:CH<x>? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:COUPling Arguments speciﬁes to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal. RISE speciﬁes to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal. FALL speciﬁes to trigger on either the rising or falling edge of a signal.
Page 514 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel This command sets or queries the level for the trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then viewing or setting the trigger Level or selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and setting the B Trig Level voltage.
Page 515 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the A trigger level for Channel 1 to the TTL TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH1 TTL high level. might return TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2? :TRIGGER:A:LEVEL:CH2 , indicating that the A trigger level for Channel 2 is set to 1.3 V. 1.3000E+00 TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:CLAss This command sets or queries the class of the Logic Trigger.
Page 516 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern or State for the Trigger Type, and setting or viewing the Pattern Type. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd|NOR|OR} TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:FUNCtion? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> Arguments speciﬁes to trigger if all conditions are true. speciﬁes to trigger if any of the conditions are false.
Page 517 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT? :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 , indicating that a logic high is expected on Channel 1 while HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X Channel 2 and Channel 3 are “don’t care.” TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> This command sets or queries the A logical input for the logic trigger channel speciﬁed by x.
Page 518 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x>, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc: PATtern:WHEn, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit Examples might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN? :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X; :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE; WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 5.0000E-9. TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x> This command sets or queries the A or B logic trigger input for the speciﬁed channel.
Page 519 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4? , indicating that :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 HIGH the logic input for Channel 4 is logic high. TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A or B logic pattern trigger with respect to the deﬁned input pattern. This command is equivalent to selecting A or B Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern for Trigger Type, and choosing a trigger condition from the Pattern drop-down list, which is located in the Trigger When group box.
Page 520 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order to selecting the A or B Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern as the Trigger Type, selecting Less Than for the Pattern in the Trigger When settings, and entering a maximum value for Time. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 521 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the minimum TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 10.0E+00 time that the selected pattern may hold true (and generate an A logic pattern trigger) to 10 s. might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT? , indicating :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT 5.0000E-09 that the selected pattern must hold true for at least 5 ns to generate an A logic pattern trigger.
Page 522 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold: CLOCk:EDGE, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce Examples might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK? :TRIGGER:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE RISE; THRESHOLD indicating the current clock settings for setup and hold 1.4000;SOURCE CH2 triggering. TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE This command sets or queries the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering.
Page 523 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce CH<x> TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc: SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold Arguments speciﬁes the input channel, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel CH<x> instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments. Examples speciﬁes channel 1 as the TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH1 A logic setup and hold input.
Page 524 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold:CH<x> This command sets or queries the clock voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Clock Level. The value of x can range from 1 through 4.
Page 525 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA? :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE CH1 indicating the current trigger data settings. TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce This command sets or queries the data source for the setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired channel from the Data Source drop-down list.
Page 526 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the preset high level. speciﬁes the preset TTL high level. is the setup and hold data level, in V. <NR3> Examples speciﬁes the preset TTL TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD TTL high level as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger. might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD? , indicating...
Page 527 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime This command sets or queries the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Hold Time. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>...
Page 528 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes a trigger if any detectable event occurs. OCCurs speciﬁes a trigger if the individual channel qualiﬁcations meet the LOGIc logic patterns and thresholds set by the TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> commands. Examples sets the trigger qualiﬁer to TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:QUALIFY OCCURS OCCurs, which initiates a trigger if the instrument detects any setup and hold trigger qualiﬁcations.
Page 529 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:STATE? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH<x>, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:STATE: WHEn Examples might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE? :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE; :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH<x> This command sets or queries the slope for the channel speciﬁed by x when the logic class is set to STATE. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired channel input (NEG or POS) from the Ch drop-down list.
Page 530 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A or B logic state trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig menu and choosing the desired condition from the Trigger When Pattern drop-down list. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 531 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD? :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD CH1 24.0000E-03; CH2 , indicating the threshold 1.2000E+00;CH3 1.2000E+00; CH4 1.2000E+00 voltages for the channels in an A logic trigger are as follows: channel 1 = 24 mV; channel 2 = 1.2 V; channel 3 = 1.2 V; channel 4 = 1.2 V. TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>...
Page 532 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:LVLSrcpreference, TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> Arguments speciﬁes the preset ECL high level. speciﬁes the preset TTL high level. speciﬁes the threshold voltage in user units. <NR3> Examples sets the A trigger threshold voltage TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH2 TTL for Channel 2 to the TTL low level. might return TRIGGER:A:LOWERTHRESHOLD:CH3? , indicating that the A...
Page 533 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:CLAss This command sets or queries the type of pulse on which to trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting the setup menu for the pulse type that you want from the Trig menu: Glitch Setup, Width Setup, Runt Setup, Timeout Setup, or Transition Setup.
Page 534 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes a width pulse for the A trigger. TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS? :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS , indicating that a pulse was found that is of the speciﬁed polarity and GLITCH width. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:GLItch? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the current glitch pulse trigger parameters. This command query is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the current glitch trigger settings.
Page 535 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes that the instrument will only trigger when the polarity of NEGative the glitch is negative. speciﬁes that the instrument will trigger when the polarity of the glitch EITher is either positive or negative. Examples speciﬁes that the polarity of TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY EITHER the glitch can be either positive or negative for the A trigger to occur.
Page 536 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:GLItch:QUAlify This command sets or queries the Glitch Trigger qualiﬁcation. This is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig menu and selecting Occurs or Logic in the Trigger if Glitch drop-down list box. NOTE. If you use the LOGIc argument, you must specify the channel logic conditions.
Page 537 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes that the instrument will only trigger on pulses that are narrower ACCept than the speciﬁed width, when the trigger type is set to glitch. The width is speciﬁed using the TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:GLItch:WIDth command. speciﬁes that the instrument will only trigger on pulses that are wider than REJect the speciﬁed width, when the trigger type is set to glitch.
Page 538 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the current runt trigger parameters. This command query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:GLItch?, TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TIMEOut?, TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition?,...
Page 539 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the polarity of the A TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY NEGATIVE pulse runt trigger to negative. might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY? , indicating that the polarity :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE of the A pulse runt trigger is set to positive. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:POLarity:CH<x> This command sets or queries the polarity for the A or B pulse runt trigger for the channel.
Page 540 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:QUAlify This command sets or queries the Runt Trigger qualiﬁcation. This is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and selecting Occurs or Logic in the Trigger if Runt drop-down list box. NOTE. If you use the LOGIc argument, you must specify the channel logic conditions.
Page 541 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD? :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.0000E+00; LOW 8.0000E-01 indicating that the upper threshold is 2 V and that the lower threshold is set to 0.8 V. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh (No Query Form) This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower switching thresholds for the pulse runt trigger.
Page 542 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the upper limit of TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 120E-3 the pulse runt trigger to 120 mV. might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH? , indicating that :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.1000E+00 the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger is currently set to 1.1 V. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW This command sets or queries the lower limit for the pulse runt trigger.
Page 543 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:WIDth Arguments argument speciﬁes a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs. OCCurs speciﬁes a trigger event if a runt greater than the speciﬁed width WIDERthan occurs. Examples sets the runt trigger to occur when TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN WIDERTHAN the instrument detects a runt in a pulse wider than the speciﬁed width.
Page 544 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order (Glitch, Width, Runt, Timeout, or Transition), and then choosing the desired channel from the Source pull-down list. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:SOUrce CH<x> TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:SOUrce? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce Arguments speciﬁes one of the input channels, which range from 1 through 4. CH<x>...
Page 545 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity This command sets or queries the polarity for the pulse timeout trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout Setup from the Trig menu and setting the desired polarity in the Trigger When box. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 546 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments indicates that a pulse edge must stay high (positive) for the required STAYSHigh time period to permit time out triggering to occur. This is the default polarity. indicates that a pulse edge must stay low (negative) for the required STAYSLow time period to permit time out triggering to occur.
Page 547 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:QUALIFY? , indicating that a :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:QUALIFY OCCURS trigger will occur if the instrument detects any of the timeout qualiﬁcations. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe This command sets or queries the pulse timeout trigger time (measured in seconds). This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout Setup from the Trig menu and setting a value for Timer.
Page 548 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION? might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWERTHAN indicating the current transition time trigger settings. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime This command sets or queries the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the transition trigger. This is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and setting the Time.
Page 549 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime Arguments indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most POSITIVe negative) to higher (most positive) level for transition triggering to occur. indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most positive) NEGative to lower (most negative) level for transition triggering to occur.
Page 550 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:POLARITY? , indicating that the :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:POLARITY EITHER transition can be either positive or negative for trigger A. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:QUAlify This command sets or queries the Transition Time Trigger qualiﬁcation. This is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and selecting Occurs or Logic in the Trigger if Violation drop-down list box.
Page 551 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime, TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse: TRANsition:POLarity Examples might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD? :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW , indicating that the upper threshold limit to 1.2 V and lower 800.0000E-3 threshold limit for the transition time trigger to 0.8 V. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh (No Query Form) This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower thresholds for the transition trigger.
Page 552 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH <NR3> TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW Arguments speciﬁes the upper threshold, in volts. <NR3> Examples sets the upper TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH 120E-3 limit of the pulse transition trigger to 120 mV. might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH? :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.0000E+00 indicating that the upper limit of the pulse transition trigger is 2 V.
Page 553 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Transition Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the Trigger When Transition Time setting. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn {FASTERthan|SLOWERthan} TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime, TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse: TRANsition:POLarity, TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold? Arguments sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than FASTERthan the set volts/second rate.
Page 554 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH? :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E-9; HIGHLIMIT as the current A width 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN; POLARITY POSITIVE trigger parameters. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit This command sets or queries the upper limit for the width trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the Trig menu and setting the Upper Limit.
Page 555 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the A pulse width trigger lower limit, in seconds. <NR3> Examples sets the lower limit of the TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-6 width trigger to 2 µs. might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT? , indicating that the lower :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 1.0000E-9 limit of the width trigger is set to 1 ns.
Page 556 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WIDth:POLarity:CH<x> {NEGAtive|POSITIVe} TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WIDth:POLarity:CH<x>? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WIDth? Arguments speciﬁes a negative pulse. NEGAtive speciﬁes a positive pulse. POSITIVe Examples sets the pulse polarity TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY:CH4 NEGATIVE to negative for Channel 4. might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY:CH4? , indicating that the :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY:CH4 POSITIVE pulse polarity is set to positive for Channel 4.
Page 557 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:QUALIFY? , indicating that an A trigger :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:QUALIFY OCCURS will occur if the instrument detects any of the width qualiﬁcations. TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WIDth:WHEn This command sets or queries whether to trigger on a pulse width that falls outside (or within) the speciﬁed range of limits.
Page 558 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow? Examples might return TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW? :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE INSIDE; WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000e-9; LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW; :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000; :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:EVENT This command sets or queries the window trigger event. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and selecting from the Window Event box.
Page 559 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:QUAlify This command sets or queries the Window Trigger qualiﬁcation. This is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and selecting Occurs or Logic in the Trigger if Window drop-down list box. NOTE. If you use the LOGIc argument, you must specify the channel logic conditions.
Page 560 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh (No Query Form) This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower switching thresholds for the window trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the Upper Level and Lower Level voltages. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 561 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW This command sets or queries the lower limit for the window trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and setting the Lower Level voltage. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW <NR3> TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW? Arguments speciﬁes the threshold value in volts.
Page 562 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> This command sets or queries the CH<x> upper trigger level for TRIGger:LVLSrcpreference SRCDependent. The CH<x> range is 1 to 4. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x> {ECL|TTL|<NR3>} TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>? Related Commands TRIGger:LVLSrcpreference, TRIGger:{A|B}:LOWerthreshold:CH<x> Arguments speciﬁes the ECL high level. speciﬁes the TTL high level.
Page 563 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum and SETLevel maximum values of the trigger input signal. Examples sets the trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum TRIGGER:A SETLEVEL and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
Page 564 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:CAN:CONDition CAN option only: This command sets or returns the CAN condition. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:CAN:CONDition {SOF|FRAMEtype|IDENTifier|DATA|IDANDDATA|EOF|ACKMISS} TRIGger:A:CAN:CONDition? Arguments enables triggering on the start of frame. enables triggering on the type of frame. FRAMEtype enables triggering on a matching identiﬁer.
Page 565 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the CAN data direction to TRIGGER:A:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION WRITE Write. might return TRIGGER:A:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION? , indicating that the CAN data :TRIGGER:A:CAN:DATA:DIRECTION READ direction is set to Read. TRIGger:A:CAN:DATa:LEVel CAN option only: This command sets or queries the CAN Trigger threshold for the CAN data source.
Page 566 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:CAN:DATa:VALue CAN option only: This command sets or quires the binary data string used for CAN Trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:CAN:DATa:VALue <String> TRIGger:A:CAN:DATa:VALue? Arguments is up to 32 bits specifying the CAN data value.
Page 567 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:CAN:FRAMEtype {DATA|REMote|ERROR|OVERLOAD} TRIGger:A:CAN:FRAMEtype? Arguments speciﬁes a data frame type. DATA speciﬁes a remote frame type. REMote speciﬁes an error frame type. ERROR speciﬁes an overload frame type. OVERLOAD Examples sets the CAN trigger frame type to data.
Page 568 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:CAN:IDENTifier:VALue <String> TRIGger:A:CAN:IDENTifier:VALue? Arguments is up to 29 bits specifying the CAN identiﬁer value. String Examples sets the CAN trigger identiﬁer TRIGGER:A:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE 1011 value to 1011. might return TRIGGER:A:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE? , indicating that the CAN :TRIGGER:A:CAN:IDENTIFIER:VALUE 10111 trigger identiﬁer value is set to 10111.
Page 569 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:CAN:SPEed <NR3> TRIGger:A:CAN:SPEed? Arguments speciﬁes the bit rate of the CAN system. Possible values are 1M, 800K, <NR3> 500K, 250K, 125K, 100K, 83.3K, 62,5K, 50K, 33K, 20K, and 10K. Examples sets the CAN systems with a bit rate of 33K.
Page 570 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:COMMunication:{AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS}:THReshold:HIGH This entry covers ﬁve separate commands, one each for AMI and AMI subtypes. This command sets or queries the threshold high level. Conditions This command is only valid if the instrument has Option MTM is installed Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 571 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW 2.8E-2 threshold low level to 2.8E-2. might return TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW? , indicating the :TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW 2.8E-2 threshold low level in volts. TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate This command sets or queries the bit rate. Conditions This command is only valid if the instrument has Option MTM is installed Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 572 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal. RISe speciﬁes to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal. FALL Examples sets RISE as the clock TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE polarity.
Page 573 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions This command is valid only if the instrument has Option MTM is installed. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe {AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS|CMI|NRZ|MLT3|MANChester} TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe? Arguments HDB3 B3ZS B6ZS B8ZS MLT3 MANChester Examples sets the AMI as the line code that the TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CODE AMI communications trigger expects on the incoming signal.
Page 574 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments argument selects CH 1 as the source channel. argument selects CH 2 as the source channel. argument selects CH 3 as the source channel. argument selects CH 4 as the source channel. Examples sets Channel 1 as the source TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE CH1 channel.
Page 575 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:COMMunication:STANdard This command sets or queries the standard that identiﬁes the code and bit rate. The bit rate is used to compute the Unit Interval, which is the inverse of the bit rate. The Unit Interval inﬂuences time skew in an Eye Diagram, where you perform post processing on AMI isolated pulses, and pulse width settings if CMI.
Page 576 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-19: Communication Trigger Standards (cont.) Argument Code Bit Rate Mask Type Models 270 Mb/s Video 143.18 Mb/s Video DS0 Contra 16.0 kb/s ITU-T G.730 DS0 Double 32.0 kb/s ITU-T G.730 DS0 Single 64.0 kb/s ITU-T G.730 DS0 Timing 32.0 kb/s...
Page 577 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-19: Communication Trigger Standards (cont.) Argument Code Bit Rate Mask Type Models OC48 FEC 2.666 Gb/s Sonet PCIEXPRESS 2.5 Gb/s PCI-Express RATE32Mbit 32.064 Mb/s RATE97Mbit 97.728 Mb/s RIO_500M 500 Mb/s RapidIO/LP-LVDS ≥1.0 GHz RIO_750_M 1 Gb/s RapidIO/LP-LVDS RIO_1G...
Page 578 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:HOLDoff? Related Commands TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?, TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY, TRIGger:A: HOLDoff:TIMe Examples might return TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF? :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME , indicating that the A edge trigger holdoff time 900.0000E-09;BY DEFAULT (by default) is set to 900 ns. TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the holdoff time actually used (expressed in seconds) by the A trigger.
Page 579 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe Arguments enables you to set the holdoff time via the TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe TIMe command. automatically calculates a holdoff time to use. This time is typically DEFAult equivalent to the greater of 1/2 screen (5 divisions) of time or 250 ns. The maximum value is 12 s.
Page 580 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:I2C:ADDRess:MODe {ADDR7|ADDR10} TRIGger:A:I2C:ADDRess:MODe? Arguments speciﬁes the 7-bit I2C address mode. ADDR7 speciﬁes the 10-bit I2C address mode. ADDR10 Examples sets the I2C address mode to 10-bit. TRIGGER:A:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADDR10 might return TRIGGER:A:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE? , indicating that the I2C address :TRIGGER:A:I2C:ADDRESS:MODE ADD7...
Page 581 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe {GENeralcall|STARtbyte|TENbit|NONe} TRIGger:A:I2C:ADDRess:TYPe? Arguments speciﬁes a generalcall address type. GENERALCALL speciﬁes a startbyte address type. STARTBYTE speciﬁes a tenbit address type. TENBIT speciﬁes I2C address type of none. NONE Examples sets the I2C address type to none. TRIGGER:A:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE NONE might return TRIGGER:A:I2C:ADDRESS:TYPE?
Page 582 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:I2C:CLOCk:LEVel <NR3> TRIGger:A:I2C:CLOCk:LEVel? Arguments speciﬁes the I2C clock level. The clock level range is ±5. Examples sets the I2C clock level to 0.0. TRIGGER:A:I2C:CLOCK:LEVEL 0.0 might return TRIGGER:A:I2C:CLOCK:LEVEL? , indicating that the I2C clock level :TRIGGER:A:I2C:CLOCK:LEVEL 5.0000 is set to 5.
Page 583 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes triggering on the start of a packet. START speciﬁes triggering on the stop packet. STOP speciﬁes triggering on a repeated start of packet. REPEATSTART speciﬁes triggering on a missing acknowledgement. ACKMISS speciﬁes triggering on the address. ADDRESS speciﬁes triggering on the speciﬁed data.
Page 584 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:I2C:DATa:LEVel DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the threshold level for the I2C data source. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:I2C:DATa:LEVel <NR3> TRIGger:A:I2C:DATa:LEVel? Arguments speciﬁes the I2C data level with a range of ±%.0. <NR3>...
Page 585 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:I2C:DATa:STARt DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the data start byte. This byte is only needed if triggering on data. This byte is the ﬁrst byte that pattern matching uses. The byte is a destination offset from the start of the packet. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax...
Page 586 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:I2C:FORMat {BINary|HEX} TRIGger:A:I2C:FORMat? Arguments speciﬁes binary format for I2C triggering. BINary speciﬁes hexadecimal format for I2C triggering. Examples sets the I2C trigger format to hexadecimal. TRIGGER:A:I2C:FORMAT HEX might return TRIGGER:A:I2C:FORMAT? :TRIGGER:A:I2C:FORMAT BINARY indicating that the I2C trigger format is set to binary.
Page 587 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:MODe {AUTO|NORMal} TRIGger:A:MODe? Related Commands TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel Arguments generates a trigger if one is not detected within a speciﬁed time period. AUTO waits for a valid trigger event. NORMal Examples sets the trigger mode to normal. TRIGGER:A:MODE NORMAL might return , indicating that...
Page 588 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:POLarity:CH<x> This command sets or queries the pulse trigger window polarity of the speciﬁed channel. The oscilloscope triggers only when the signal exits the window. This command is available only when the Window Event is set to Inside > t and not available for the rest of the window events.
Page 589 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the RS232 triggering baud rate to 2000. TRIGGER:A:RS232:BAUD 2000 might return TRIGGER:A:RS232:BAUD? :TRIGGER:A:RS232:BAUD 1800 indicating that the RS232 triggering baud rate is set to 1800. TRIGger:A:RS232:DATa:LEVel DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the threshold for the RS232 data source.
Page 590 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:RS232:DATa:VALue DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the binary data string used for RS232 triggering. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:RS232:DATa:VALue <String> TRIGger:A:RS232:DATa:VALue? Arguments speciﬁes the RS232 data value. The value can be up to 8 bits. <NR3>...
Page 591 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:RS232:PARity DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the state of the RS232 parity bit. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:RS232:PARity {NONe|EVEN|ODD} TRIGger:A:RS232:PARity? Arguments speciﬁes no parity. NONe speciﬁes even RS232 parity. EVEN speciﬁes odd RS232 parity.
Page 592 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:LEVel This command sets or queries the serial trigger clock level. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:LEVel <NR3> TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:LEVel? Arguments is a value in the range of 9.9E37 and is expressed in volts. <NR3> Examples sets the clock level to 0 V.
Page 593 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:POLarity This command sets or queries the serial clock polarity. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:POLarity {RISe|FALL} TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:POLarity? Arguments speciﬁes to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal. RISe speciﬁes to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal. FALL Examples sets the clock polarity to rise.
Page 594 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:SOUrce This command sets or queries the serial data source channel. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:SOUrce {CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4|RECOVered} TRIGger:A:SERIAL:CLOCk:SOUrce? Arguments speciﬁes one of the input channels. CH1-4 speciﬁes clock polarity and level are extracted from the serial data RECOVERED stream and other clock parameters are ignored.
Page 595 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:SERIAL:DATa:FORMat This command sets or queries how the Pattern string is formatted. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SERIAL:DATa:FORMat {BINary|HEX} TRIGger:A:SERIAL:DATa:FORMat? Arguments pattern symbols are: {‘SPACE’|0|1|X} ‘SPACE’ is white space and can BINary be included to make the 32 bit pattern easier to read when setting the pattern. pattern symbols are used only with NRZ.
Page 596 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples If one sets the data format to binary with a TRIGGER: A:SERIAL:DATA:FORMAT command, as follows: then the TRIGger:A:SERIAL:DATA:FORMAT BIN following query: might return the TRIGger:A:SERIAL:DATA:PATTERN? following characters: 1101XXXX10 If one next sets the data format to hexadecimal with the commands as follows: TRIGGER:A:SERIAL:DATA:FORMAT then the following query:...
Page 597 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples If one sets the data format to binary with a TRIGGER: A:SERIAL:DATA:FORMAT command, as follows: then the TRIGger:A:SERIAL:DATA:FORMAT BIN following query: might return the TRIGger:A:SERIAL:DATA:PATTERN:NRZ? following characters: 1101XXXX10 If one next sets the data format to hexadecimal with the commands as follows: TRIGGER:A:SERIAL:DATA:FORMAT then the following query:...
Page 598 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples If one sets the data format to binary with a TRIGGER: A:SERIAL:DATA:FORMAT command, as follows: then the TRIGger:A:SERIAL:DATA:FORMAT BIN following query: might return TRIGger:A:SERIAL:DATA:PATTERN:S8B10B? the following characters: 1101XXXX10 If one next sets the data format to hexadecimal with the commands as follows: TRIGGER:A:SERIAL:DATA:FORMAT then the following query:...
Page 599 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:A:SERIAL:LOCKLEN? :TRIGGER:A:SERIAL:LOCKLEN , indicating that the Pattern string is set to a 10000 bits. 10000 TRIGger:A:SERIAL:LOCKOffset This command sets or queries the current bit offset into the pattern lock trigger bit pattern. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SERIAL:LOCKOffset <NR1>...
Page 600 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:SERIAL:STANdard This command sets or queries the standard that identiﬁes the code and bit rate. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SERIAL:STANdard {FC133|FC266|FC531|FC1063|D1|D2|VIDEO270|VIDEO360|OC1|OC3| OC12|ENET1250|FW1394BS400B|FW1394BS800B|CUSTom|ENET100FX| RIO_500M|RIO_750M|RIO_1G|RIO_SERIAL_1G|VSROC192|ENETXAUI| SAS3_?|PCIExpress|INFINIBAND|RIO_SERIAL_2G|RIO_SERIAL_3G| FC2125|RIO_2G|FW1394BS1600B|SAS1_5|ENETXAUI|ENETXAUI2| FC2125|FC4250|FW1394BS1600B|INFINIBAND|PCIExpress|PCIExpress2| RIO_2G|RIO_500M|RIO_750M|RIO_SERIAL_1G|RIO_SERIAL_2_5G| RIO_SERIAL_3G|SAS6_0|SATA1_5|SATA3_0|SATA6_0} TRIGger:A:SERIAL:STANdard? Related Commands Arguments All of the standards may not be available on every instrument. : NRZ, 155.5 Mb/s CUSTom : MLT3, 100 Mb/s...
Page 601 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order : NRZ, 622.1 Mb/s OC12 : NRZ, 2.5 Gb/s PCIExpress : NRZ, 5.0 Gb/s PCIExpress2 : NRZ, 2.0Gb/s RIO_2G : NRZ, 500 Mb/s, triggers RIO_DRV500, RIO_EDRV500M, and RIO_500M RIO_RCV500, 500Mb/s : NRZ, 750 Mb/s, triggers RIO_DRV750, RIO_EDRV750M, and RIO_750M RIO_RCV750, 750Mb/s : NRZ, 1.0 Gb/s, triggers RIO_1G...
Page 602 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the trigger on a designated arbitrary bit pattern. PATtern speciﬁes the trigger locks a repeating pattern of known length. LOck Examples sets trigger on a designated arbitrary TRIGGER:A:SERIAL:TRIGGERON PATTERN bit pattern. might return TRIGGER:A:SERIAL:TRIGGERON? , indicating that the trigger locks a :TRIGGER:A:SERIAL:TRIGGERON LOCK...
Page 603 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes HIGH polarity. HIGH speciﬁes LOW polarity. Examples sets the SPI trigger MISO polarity TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MISO:ACTIVE HIGH to high. might return TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MISO:ACTIVE? , indicating that the SPI MISO :TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MISO:ACTIVE LOW polarity is set to low. TRIGger:A:SPI:DATa:MISO:LEVel DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the threshold for the SPI MISO data source.
Page 604 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments CH<x> speciﬁes the source for the SPI trigger MISO data source. X can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. Examples sets the SPI trigger MISO data TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MISO:SOURCE CH2 source to channel CH2. might return TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MISO:SOURCE? , indicating that the SPI trigger :TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MISO:SOURCE CH1...
Page 605 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes HIGH polarity. HIGH speciﬁes LOW polarity. Examples sets the SPI trigger MOSI polarity TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MOSI:ACTIVE HIGH to HIGH. might return TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MISO:ACTIVE? , indicating that the SPI MOSI :TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MISO:ACTIVE LOW polarity is set to LOW. TRIGger:A:SPI:DATa:MOSI:LEVel DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the threshold for the SPI MOSI data source.
Page 606 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments CH<x> speciﬁes the source for the SPI trigger MOSI data source. X can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. Examples sets the SPI trigger MOSI data TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MOSI:SOURCE CH2 source to channel CH2. might return TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MOSI:SOURCE? , indicating that the SPI trigger :TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:MOSI:SOURCE CH1...
Page 607 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes the SPI start byte data. The data can range from 0 to 2 –1. <NR3> Examples sets the SPI trigger data start to 0. TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:START 0 might return TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:START? :TRIGGER:A:SPI:DATA:START , indicating that the SPI trigger data is set to 1. TRIGger:A:SPI:FORMat DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the SPI trigger data format.
Page 608 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the SPI SCLK polarity to fall. TRIGGER:A:SPI:SCLK:ACTIVE FALL might return TRIGGER:A:SPI:SCLK:ACTIVE? , indicating that the SPI SCLK polarity :TRIGGER:A:SPI:SCLK:ACTIVE FALL is set to FALL. TRIGger:A:SPI:SCLK:LEVel DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the threshold for the SPI trigger SCLK.
Page 609 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:SPI:SS:ACTIVE DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the SPI trigger Slave Select (SS) polarity. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SPI:SS:ACTIVE {HIGH|LOW} TRIGger:A:SPI:SS:ACTIVE? Arguments speciﬁes HIGH for SS polarity. HIGH speciﬁes LOW for SS polarity. Examples sets the SPI trigger SS polarity to HIGH.
Page 610 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:SPI:SS:SOUrce DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the SPI trigger Slave Select (SS) source. Group Low Speed Serial Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:SPI:SS:SOUrce CH<x> TRIGger:A:SPI:SS:SOUrce? Arguments CH<x> speciﬁes the source for the SPI SS signal. X can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. Examples sets the SPI trigger Slave Select (SS) source TRIGGER:A:SPI:SS:SOURCE CH2...
Page 611 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through EDGE a speciﬁed voltage level in a speciﬁed direction and is controlled by the TRIGger:A: commands. EDGE speciﬁes that a trigger occurs when speciﬁed conditions are met and is LOGIc controlled by the TRIGger:A: commands.
Page 612 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return TRIGGER:A:VIDEO? :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED; SCAN RATE1; :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD ALLFIELDS; HOLDOFF:FIELD 1.0000;TIME 20.0000E-3; :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 1;SCAN RATE1; SOURCE CH1;STANDARD NTSC. TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom? (Query Only) DPO7000 Series only: This query-only command returns the A trigger custom video parameters. Group Trigger Syntax...
Page 613 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:LINEPeriod DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the period horizontal line scan. Use this command only when the video format is set to Bilevel or Trilevel. This is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu, setting Bilevel or Trilevel for Format, and setting the Line Period.
Page 614 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the video ﬁeld or line that the trigger detects. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD {ODD|EVEN|FIELD1|FIELD2|ALLFields|ALLLines|NUMERic} TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD? Arguments argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video odd ﬁelds. argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video even ﬁelds.
Page 615 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments argument is a real number from 0.0 to 8.5 in increments of 0.5. The <NR3> argument sets the number of ﬁelds that the instrument waits before rearming the video trigger. Examples sets the instrument to wait 4.5 video TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD 4.5 ﬁelds before rearming the trigger.
Page 616 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2-20: Video Line Numbering Ranges (cont.) Video Standard Line Number Range HD1080P25 1–1125 1–1125 HD1080SF24 Examples sets the instrument to trigger on the line 23. TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 23 might return TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE? :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 10 indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on line 10. TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the polarity of the A video trigger.
Page 617 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN {RATE1|RATE2|RATE3|RATE4|RATE5} TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN? Arguments argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 15 kHz through RATE1 20 kHz. This is the standard broadcast rate. argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 20 kHz through RATE2 25 kHz.
Page 618 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard DPO7000 Series only: This command sets or queries the video standard. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard {BILevelcustom|TRILevelcustom|NTSc|PAL| SECAM|HD480P60|HD576P50|HD875I60|HD720P30|HD720P50| HD720P60|HD1080I50|HD1080I60|HD1080P24| HD1080P25|HD1080P30|HD1080P50|HD1080P60| HD1080SF24} TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard? Arguments argument sets the instrument to use custom video parameters BILevelcustom that you set with the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SYNCInterval command.
Page 619 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/24 HD1080P24 progressive format. argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/25 HD1080P25 progressive format. argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/30 HD1080P30 progressive format. argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/50 HD1080P50 progressive format.
Page 620 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return , indicating that TRIGger:AUXlevel? :TRIGGER:AUXLEVEL TTL the auxiliary level for the edge trigger is set to TTL. TRIGger:B (No Query Form) This command sets the B trigger level to 50% of minimum and maximum. The query form of this command returns the B trigger parameters.
Page 621 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:B:BY {EVENTS|TIMe} TRIGger:B:BY? Related Commands TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt, TRIGger:B:TIMe, HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay: MODe, HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe TRIGger:B:STATE Arguments sets the B trigger to take place following a set number of trigger EVENTS events after the A trigger occurs. The number of events is speciﬁed by TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger event.
Page 622 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A →B Seq tab, choosing Trig on nth event, and setting the desired Trig Event value. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt <NR1> TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt? Related Commands TRIGger:B:EVENTS?, TRIGger:B:STATE...
Page 623 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:B:PULSE:WINDOW:POLARITY? , indicating that :TRIGGER:B:PULSE:WINDOW:POLARITY NEGATIVE the window polarity is set to negative. TRIGger:B:PULse:WINdow:POLarity:CH<x> This command sets or queries the pulse trigger window polarity of the speciﬁed channel. The oscilloscope triggers only when the signal exits the window. This command is available only when the Window Event is set to Inside >...
Page 624 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments speciﬁes one of the input channels as the reset source. Input channels CH<x> are speciﬁed by x. speciﬁes an external trigger (using the Auxiliary Trigger Input AUXiliary connector) as the reset source. Examples sets Channel 4 as the input source for the TRIGGER:B:RESET:SOURCE CH4 trigger reset.
Page 625 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax TRIGger:B:RESET:THReshold {ECL|TTL|<NR3>} TRIGger:B:RESET:THReshold? Related Commands TRIGger:B:RESET:STATE Arguments sets the reset threshold to ECL voltage levels. sets the reset threshold to TTL voltage levels. sets the reset threshold in volts. <NR3> Examples sets the trigger reset threshold level to TRIGGER:B:RESET:THRESHOLD TTL TTL.
Page 626 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:B:RESET:TRANsition This command sets or queries the type of threshold required for a Transition trigger reset. Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:B:RESET:TRANsition {RISe|FALL} TRIGger:B:RESET:TRANsition? Related Commands TRIGger:B:RESET:SOUrce, TRIGger:B:RESET:THReshold, TRIGger:B: RESET:TYPe Arguments indicates that a reset occurs when the trigger rises above the threshold level. RISe indicates that a reset occurs when the trigger falls below the threshold level.
Page 627 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments defeats the trigger reset feature. NONe initiates a reset if the timeout conditions speciﬁed by TIMEOut TRIGger:B:RESET:TIMEOut are met. initiates a reset if the state conditions speciﬁed by STATE TRIGger: B:RESET:SOUrce, TRIGger:B:RESET:STATE, and TRIGger:B:RESET:THReshold are met. initiates a reset if the transition conditions speciﬁed TRANsition by TRIGger:B:RESET:SOUrce, TRIGger:B:RESET:TRANsition, and...
Page 628 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger:B:TIMe This command sets or queries B trigger delay time. The B Trigger time applies only if TRIGger:B:BY is set to TIMe. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, choosing the A®B Seq tab, and setting Trig Delay.
Page 629 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the B trigger type to edge. TRIGGER:B:TYPE EDGE might return , indicating that the TRIGGER:B:TYPE? :TRIGGER:B:TYPE EDGE B trigger type is set to EDGE. TRIGger:ENHanced This command sets or queries the state of trigger position enhancement. When on, the instrument improves the trigger positioning to more closely match the acquired data.
Page 630 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the level of all trigger sources to the value you currently SRCDependent select, regardless of the last value selected. sets each trigger source to the level you are currently selecting. SRCIndependent Examples allows you to set the level TRIGger:LVLSRCPREFERENCE SRCIINDEPENDENT of each source to the value you are currently selecting.
Page 631 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples starts the TekLink trigger alignment procedure TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:ALIGN on all the oscilloscopes that are participating in MultiScope triggering. TRIGger:MULTiscope:ALIGN:COMPleted? (Query Only) This command returns whether the oscilloscope has successfully completed the MultiScope trigger align procedure. Group TekLink Syntax...
Page 632 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples causes the instrument to TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:ALIGN:SETSTATE Start measure the round trip time between sending a trigger out the TekLink port and receiving the trigger pulse back from the port. might return TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:ALIGN:SETSTATE? , indicating that :TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:ALIGN:SETSTATE DONE the calibration is complete.
Page 633 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group TekLink Syntax TRIGger:MULTiscope:ALIGN:VALue? Examples might return TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:ALIGN:VALUE? , indicating that the :TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:ALIGN:VALUE 33.000E–6 round trip trigger time is 33 μs. TRIGger:MULTiscope:DELay? (Query Only) This command queries the delay time, in nanoseconds, for trigger out of the TekLink trigger out line.
Page 634 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:OPTION? , indicating that the hub and all :TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:OPTION AND participating instruments are set to AND triggering. TRIGger:MULTiscope:LOGic This command sets or queries the TekLink trigger conﬁguration when the TekLink network connection is HUB. Group TekLink Syntax...
Page 635 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order takes the instrument off the MultiScope trigger network. NONe Examples sets the instrument to supply triggers TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:ROLE Producer to the MultiScope trigger network. might return TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:ROLE? :TRIGGER:MULTISCOPE:ROLE , indicating that the instrument consumes triggers. CONSUMER TRIGger:SENSITivity This command set or queries the state of trigger sensitivity.
Page 636 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger:STATE? Related Commands TRIGger:A:MODe Returns indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information. ARMED indicates that the instrument is in the automatic mode and acquires data AUTO even in the absence of a trigger. indicates that the instrument is in DPO mode.
Page 637 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE. If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS), the UNLock command has no effect. For more information, see the ANSI-IEEE Std 488.1-1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.
Page 638 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order A 0 returns minimum-length keywords for applicable setting queries; any other value returns full-length keywords. Examples sets the Verbose state to true and return the full length keyword for VERBOSE ON the applicable setting queries. might return , indicating that the Verbose state is set to VERBOSE?
Page 639 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return the waveform data as: WAVFRM? :WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG ASC;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT Y; PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0;XINCR 400.0000E-12; XZERO 0.0000;XUNIT "s";YMULT 4.0000E-3; YOFF 0.0000;YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT "V"; WFID "Ch1,DC coupling, 100.0mV/div, 200.0ns/div, 5000 points,Sampl mode"; :CURVE51,50,51,48,51,48,50,49,51,49,51,48,51,48,51,49, 50,49,50,48,49,49,52,49,49,50,50,48,50,49,49, 49,49,49,50,47,49,47,50,48,49,48,50,48,49,47,...
Page 640 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order each response to has a response prepended CURVESTREAM WAVFRMS? WFMOUTPRE to it. This helps guarantee a continuous synchronized preamble and curve. Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WAVFRMStream? Returns WFMOUTPRE? and CURVESTREAM? query responses. Examples Single data source (1 channel, record length 1000). might return WAVFRMSTREAM? :WFMOUTPRE <WFMOUTPRE branch query>;:CURVE #41000<binary...
Page 641 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMInpre? Related Commands WFMOutpre? Examples might return the waveform formatting as WFMINPRE? :WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMTRI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG BIN;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT Y; PT_OFF 0;XINCR 2.0000E-6;XZERO 1.7536E-6; XUNIT "s";YMULT 1.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0000; YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT "V" WFMInpre:BIT_Nr This command sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the waveform, as speciﬁed by the...
Page 642 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax WFMInpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP} WFMInpre:BN_Fmt? Related Commands WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt Arguments speciﬁes signed integer data point representation. speciﬁes positive integer data point representation. speciﬁes single-precision binary ﬂoating point representation. Examples speciﬁes that incoming data will be interpreted as WFMINPRE:BN_FMT FP single-precision binary ﬂoating point numbers.
Page 643 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre:BYT_Or This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted ﬁrst for incoming waveform data when data points require more than one byte. This speciﬁcation only has meaning when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is greater than 1.
Page 644 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the format of incoming waveform data to ASCII WFMINPRE:ENCDG ASCii format. might return , indicating that WFMINPRE:ENCDG? :WFMINPRE:ENCDG BINary the incoming waveform data is in binary format. WFMInpre:NR_FR This command sets or returns one frame, indicating the number of frames in the transmitted waveform record.
Page 645 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the number of data points if WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to Y. It is the <NR1> number of min-max pairs if WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to ENV. Examples speciﬁes that 5000 data points will be transmitted. WFMINPRE:NR_PT 5000 might return , indicating that there...
Page 646 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre:PT_Off This command speciﬁes or returns the trigger point within the waveform record for the reference waveform speciﬁed by the DATa:DESTination command. Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMInpre:PT_Off <NR1> WFMInpre:PT_Off? Related Commands DATa:DESTination, DATa:STARt, WFMOutpre:PT_Off? Arguments is -(record length -1) to record length and is the position of the data <NR1>...
Page 647 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre:XINcr This command sets or queries the horizontal interval between incoming waveform points in units speciﬁed by WFMInpre:XUNit. Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMInpre:XINcr <NR3> WFMInpre:XINcr? Related Commands WFMInpre:XUNit, WFMOutpre:XINcr? Arguments is the horizontal interval representation. <NR3>...
Page 648 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMInpre:XZEro This command sets or queries the sub-sample time between the trigger sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger on the incoming waveform. This value is used to compute TTOFF for the incoming waveform, and is expressed in terms of WFMInpre:XUNit.
Page 649 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples speciﬁes that (if WFMInpre:YUNit is “V” WFMINPRE:YMULT 20E-3 and WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is 1), the vertical scale is 20 mV/digitizing level (500 mV/div). might return , indicating WFMINPRE:YMULT? :WFMINPRE:YMULT 40.0000E-3 that the vertical scale is 40 mV/digitizing level (1V/div). WFMInpre:YOFf This command sets or queries the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels.
Page 650 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the <QString> vertical unit of measure for the incoming waveform. Examples speciﬁes that the vertical units for the incoming WFMINPRE:YUNIT "PA" waveform are Pascal. might return , indicating the WFMINPRE:YUNIT? :WFMINPRE:YUNIT "s"...
Page 651 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Waveform Transfer Syntax WFMOutpre? Examples might return the waveform formatting data as: WFMOUTPRE? ? :WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1; BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG BIN;NR_PT 500; PT_FMT Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0; XINCR 8.0000E-9;XZERO 4.8794E-9; XUNIT "s";YMULT -2000.0000E-3; YOFF -4999.9995E-3;YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT "V"; WFID "Ch1, DC coupling, 2.000V/div, 400.0ns/div,500 points, Sample mode"...
Page 652 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP} WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt? Related Commands DATa:SOUrce Arguments speciﬁes signed integer data point representation. speciﬁes positive integer data point representation. speciﬁes single-precision binary ﬂoating point data point representation. Examples speciﬁes that outgoing waveform data will be in WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT FP single-precision binary ﬂoating point format.
Page 653 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre:BYT_Or This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted ﬁrst, during a waveform data transfer, when data points require more than one byte. This speciﬁcation only has meaning when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN.
Page 654 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order speciﬁes that outgoing data is to be in a binary format whose further BINary speciﬁcation is determined by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or. Examples speciﬁes that the outgoing waveform data will be WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG ASCii sent in ASCII format. might return , indicating that WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG?
Page 655 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return , indicating that WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT? :WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT 5000 there are 5000 data points to be sent. WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the point format for the waveform speciﬁed by DATa:SOUrce command. The format speciﬁes a set of equations describing how the scale factors in the preamble are used to give meaning to the CURVe data points.
Page 656 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre:PT_ORder? (Query Only) This query-only command speciﬁes whether the source waveform is Fast Acquisition. A Fast Acquisition waveform is stored as a 502 (vertical) by 1000 (horizontal) point bitmap. Each point represents display intensity for that screen location.
Page 657 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns comprises the following comma-separated ﬁelds documented in the <QString> following tables: Table 2-21: Waveform Sufﬁxes Field Description Examples Source The source identiﬁcation string as it appears in “CH1–4” the front panel scale factor readouts. “Math1–3 “Ref1–4"...
Page 658 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax WFMOutpre:XINcr? Related Commands DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit? Examples might return WFMOUTPRE:XINCR? :WFMOUTPRE:XINCR 10.0000E-6 indicating that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 µs/point (500 µs/div). WFMOutpre:XUNit? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the horizontal units for the waveform speciﬁed by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Page 659 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit? Examples might return , indicating WFMOUTPRE:XZERO? :WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 5.6300E-9 that the trigger actually occurred 5.63 ns before the trigger sample. WFMOutpre:YMUlt? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level in units speciﬁed by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform speciﬁed by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Page 660 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples might return , indicating WFMOUTPRE:YOFF? :WFMOUTPRE:YOFF -50.0000E+0 that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions) below center screen. WFMOutpre:YUNit? (Query Only) This query-only command returns the vertical units for the waveform speciﬁed by DATa:SOUrce command.
Page 661 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOm This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces or live traces. The ZOOm query returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display. Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm {RESET|RESETLive} ZOOm? Arguments resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces.
Page 662 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments sets the size of the Zoom graticule to 50%. set the size of the Zoom graticule to 80%. sets the size of the Zoom graticule to 100%. Examples sets the zoom graticule size to 100%. ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE 100 might return ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE?
Page 663 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples sets the horizontal scale to 5. ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 5 might return ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE? :ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 10 indicating that the horizontal scale is set to 10. ZOOm:MATH<x>:HORizontal:POSition This command sets or queries the horizontal position of the speciﬁed math waveform.
Page 664 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return ZOOM:MATH1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE? , indicating that the horizontal scale :ZOOM:MATH1:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 5 factor of the speciﬁed Math 1 waveform to 5. ZOOm:MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition This command sets or queries the vertical position of the speciﬁed math waveform. Zoom Group Syntax ZOOm:MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>...
Page 665 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOm:MODe This command turns Zoom mode on or off. The Zoom query returns the current state of Zoom mode. This command is equivalent to pressing the ZOOM button located on the front panel. Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm:MODe {ON|OFF|<NR1>} ZOOm:MODe...
Page 666 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOm:REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle This command sets or queries the zoom horizontal scale factor of the speciﬁed reference waveform. Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm:REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3> ZOOm:REF<x>:HORizontal:SCAle? Arguments is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction in 1-2-5 increments. <NR3>...
Page 667 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOm:REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle This command sets or queries the zoom vertical scale of the speciﬁed reference waveform. Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm:REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3> ZOOm:REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle? Arguments sets the horizontal scale factor of the speciﬁed Reference 1 waveform to 10. <NR3>...
Page 668 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order might return ZOOM:SCROLL:DIRECTION? :ZOOM:SCROLL:DIRECTION , indicating that Zoom Box is moving from right to left. REVERSE ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk This command sets or returns the state of Scroll Lock, which “locks” zoomed waveforms under common control. Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk {ON|OFF|<NR1>}...
Page 669 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOm:STATE This command sets or queries the speciﬁed zoom on or off. Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>} ZOOm:STATE? Arguments turns zoom on or off. turns zoom on or off. = 0 disables the zoom; any other value enables the zoom. <NR1>...
Page 670 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle This command sets or queries the zoom vertical scale factor around which the zoom waveform is displayed. Zoom Group Syntax ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle <NR3> ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle? Arguments is the amount of expansion in the vertical direction in 1-2-5 increments. <NR3>...
Page 671 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SCALE 5; :ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.000; SCALE 1.0000; :ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION50.000; SCALE , indicating the Zoom1 transforms for 5;:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:VERTICAL... all traces. ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLock This command sets or queries Scroll Lock for the speciﬁed zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window. Group Zoom Syntax...
Page 672 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order = 0 disables the speciﬁed zoom; any other value enables the speciﬁed <NR1> zoom. Examples turns Zoom1 on. ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE ON might return , indicating that ZOOM:ZOOM2:STATE? :ZOOM:ZOOM2:STATE 1 Zoom2 is on. ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:DISplay This command sets or queries the display of the speciﬁed waveform for the speciﬁed zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window.
Page 673 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition <NR3> ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition? Arguments is a value from 0 to 100.00 and is the percent of the waveform that is to the <NR3> left of screen center, when the zoom factor is 1× or greater. Examples sets the Zoom1 reference ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50...
Page 674 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:TIMEPosition <NRF> ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:TIMEPosition? Arguments speciﬁes the horizontal position in time from the trigger. <NRF> Returns sets the Zoom1 ZOOM:ZOOM1:<wfm>:HORIZONTAL:TIMEPOSITION 1e-9 reference pointer at 1 ns in the acquired waveform. ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition This command sets or queries the vertical position of the speciﬁed waveform for the speciﬁed zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window.
Page 675 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the amount of vertical expansion or compression, which operates on a <NR3> 1-2-5 sequence (for example, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100...). Based on the value that you entered, this command uses the nearest scale factor. Setting the vertical scale to 1 indicates unity (no zoom).
Page 676 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2-664 DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 677: Status And Events
Status and Events The instrument provides a status and event reporting system for the GPIB interfaces. This system informs you of certain signiﬁcant events that occur within the instrument. The instrument status handling system consists of ﬁve 8-bit registers and two queues for each interface.
Page 678 Status and Events Table 3-1: SESR Bit Functions Function 7 (MSB) Power On. Shows that the instrument was powered on. On completion, the diagnostic tests also set this bit. User Request. Indicates that an application event has occurred. *See preceding note. Command Error.
Page 679 Status and Events Table 3-2: SBR Bit Functions (cont.) Function ———— Not used. ———— Not used. ———— Not used. 1–0 Enable DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a ﬁlter to a Status Register (the DESER also acts as a ﬁlter to the Event Queue) and can prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue.
Page 680: Queues
Status and Events *PSC Command The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending *PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows: DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command) ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command) SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command) Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile memory through a power cycle.
Page 681: Event Handling Sequence
Status and Events Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the *ESR? query to read the summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the events summarized by the *ESR? read available to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and empties the SESR.
Page 682: Synchronization Methods
Status and Events When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is recorded in the Event Queue (2).
Page 683 Status and Events To ensure that the instrument completes waveform acquisition before taking the measurement on the acquired data, you can synchronize the program. You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application program: *WAI, BUSY, *OPC, and *OPC *WAI The *WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate an OPC message.
Page 684 Status and Events controller will be unable to write more commands to the buffer. This can cause a time-out. BUSY The BUSY? query allows you to ﬁnd out whether the instrument is busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as single-sequence acquisition.
Page 685 Status and Events ACQUIRE:STATE OFF SELECT:CH1 ON HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE /* Enable the status registers */ DESE 1 *ESE 1 *SRE 0 /* Acquire waveform data */ ACQUIRE:STATE ON /* Set up the measurement parameters */ MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1 /* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement.
Page 686 Status and Events HORIZONTAL:MODE:RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE /* Enable the status registers */ DESE 1 *ESE 1 *SRE 32 /* Acquire waveform data */ ACQUIRE:STATE ON /* Set up the measurement parameters */ MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1 /* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement *OPC The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices.
Page 687 Status and Events /* Acquire waveform data */ ACQUIRE:STATE ON /* Set up the measurement parameters */ MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1 /* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement *OPC? Wait for read from Output Queue. /* Take amplitude measurement */ MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE This is the simplest approach.
Page 688 Status and Events Table 3-4: Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5) Code Message Command error Invalid character Syntax error Invalid separator Data type error GET not allowed Parameter not allowed Missing parameter Command header error Header separator error Program mnemonic too long Undeﬁned header Header sufﬁx out of range Numeric data error...
Page 689 Status and Events Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4) Code Message Execution error Invalid while in local Settings lost due to RTL Trigger error Trigger ignored Arm ignored Trigger delay not available Parameter error Settings conﬂict Data out of range Too much data Illegal parameter value Out of memory...
Page 690 Status and Events Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.) Code Message 2210 Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform 2211 Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref Crossing 2212 Measurement error, No negative crossing 2213 Measurement error, No positive crossing 2214 Measurement error, No crossing 2215...
Page 691 Status and Events Table 3-5: Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4) (cont.) Code Message 2411 Syntax error in math string 2412 Semantic error in math string 2413 Math expression is too complex 2420 Histogram cannot be performed on this type of waveform Device Error.
Page 692 Status and Events Table 3-8: Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4) Code Message Measurement warning Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude Measurement warning, Unstable histogram Measurement warning, Low resolution Measurement warning, Uncertain edge Measurement warning, Invalid min max Measurement warning, Need 3 edges Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative Measurement warning, Clipping positive Measurement warning, Clipping negative...
Page 693: Appendix A: Character Set
Appendix A: Character Set DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 694 Appendix A: Character Set DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 695: Appendix B: Reserved Words
Appendix B: Reserved Words This is a list of reserved words for your instrument. Capital letters identify the required minimum spelling. *CAL ALLOcate ATTEN400X *CLS ATTEN40X AUXIn AUXLevel *DDT AMPlitude ATTEN450X *ESE ATTEN45X AUXiliary *ESR ANNOTation ATTEN4X AUXout *IDN AOFFSet ATTEN4_5X AVErage *LRN...
Page 696 Appendix B: Reserved Words CATalog DS1A EXECUTE CENTER DS1C EXECute CENTered DASHed EXITSWindow DATA DS2RATECoax EXPort CH14 DATASource DS2RATESymmetrical EXTAtten DATE EXTDBatten DATa DS4NA EXTENded DS4NA_Max EXTINCTDB CHECKSUMDR EXTINCTPCT E1Coax CHlt;x> EXTINCTRATIO DCHAN E1Symmetrical EXTUnits CLAss DCREJect EXTernal CLEAR CLOCKCoax DDR2 EYEHeight DDR3...
Page 697 Appendix B: Reserved Words FC4250 FST3 HDB3 INPUT FC4250E_ABR FST4 HDELTA INPUTMode FC4250E_ABT FST5 INPut FC4250E_ADR FST6 HEADer INSIDEGreater FC4250E_ADT FULLNOmenu HEIght INSide FC4250E_AGR FULLSCREEN HERtz INTENSIFied FC4250E_AGT FULl INTENSITy FC4250E_NBT FUNCtion HFRej INTERLAced FC4250E_NDT FW1394BS1600B HIACQRATE INTERNal HIGH FC4250E_NGT FW1394BS1600BT1 INTERPEightbit FC531...
Page 698 Appendix B: Reserved Words LOck MINMax NUMEnv PEAKdetect LPDDR MINUSOne NUMFRAMESACQuired PENDING MINimum NUMFRames PERCent LVLSrcpreference MISO NUMITEMS PERIod MISOMOSI NUMSAMples PERSistence MAIn MKDir NUMX PHASE MAIn] MLT3 NUMY PHAse MANChester MODE NWIdth PK2Pk MANual MODe PKPKJitter OC12 MARK MONOGRAY PKPKNoise MARKSINCOLumn MONOGREEN...
Page 699 Appendix B: Reserved Words RANDom RIBinary SAS1_5_SATA SFI5_RCVDCLK2 RANge RIO_1G SAS1_5_XR SFI5_RCVDCLK3 RATDELta RIO_1_5G SAS1_5_XR_AASJ SFI5_RCVDDATA2 RATE1 RIO_2G SAS3_ SFI5_RCVDDATA3 RATE2 RIO_500M SAS3_0_CR SFI5_XMITACLK2 RATE3 RIO_750M SAS3_0_CR_AASJ SFI5_XMITACLK3 RATE32Mbit RIO_DRV1G SAS3_0_IR SFI5_XMITADATA2 RATE4 RIO_DRV1_5G SAS3_0_IR_AASJ SFI5_XMITADATA3 RATE5 RIO_DRV2G SAS3_0_SATA SFI5_XMITCCLK2 SAS3_0_XR RATE97Mbit RIO_DRV500M...
Page 700 Appendix B: Reserved Words STANDARD THReshold VERBose Ylt;x> STANdard TIFF VERT_INDEX ZERO START TIME VERTical ZERo STARt TIMEOut VFields ZOOMlt;x> STARtbyte TIMEPosition VIDEO270 ZOOMx STATE TIMEStamp VIDEO292M ZOOm STATIstics TIMe VIDEO360 asccurve STATUS TIPtype VIDeo directorypath STATe VIEW filepath VIOLATIONS STATus TOLerance filepathGPIb...
Page 701 Appendix B: Reserved Words makeEnum ListtrigMgr_ oldfilepath string stateClockSource newfilepath newworking sourcefile wfmREFx directorypath pathdestination wfmfilepath filepath wfmwfm DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 702 Appendix B: Reserved Words DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 703: Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values
Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Default Setup The following tables list the default setup values by command group. The instrument sets these values when you press the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button or send the FACtory command. Only those commands that have values set by the DEFAULT SETUP function are listed in these tables.
Page 704 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values CURSor:LINESTyle SOLID CURSor:MODe INDEPENDENT CURSor:SCREEN:STYle LINES CURSor:SOUrce<x> CURSor:STATE CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> 1 = -1.6000E-6 2 = 1.6000E-6 CURSor:VBArs:UNIts SECONDS CURSor:WAVEform:POSition<x> 1 = -1.6000E-6 2 = 1.6000E-6 1 = CH1 2 = CH1 LINE_X CURSor:WAVEform:STYle CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts BASE...
Page 705 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASKHighlight 140,50,100 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH<x> 1 = 160,50,100 2 = 40,60,100 3 = 120,60,100 4 = 195,50,100 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:REF<x> 1 = 0,90,0 2 = 0,90,100 3 = 60,90,100 4 = 240,90,100 DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr DEFAULT DISplay:FILTer SINX DISplay:FORMat FULL...
Page 706 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values EMail:IMAGe EMail:MASK EMail:MAXSize EMail:MEASUrement EMail:NUMEMails EMail:SMTPPort EMail:SMTPServer "" EMail:TIMEOut "" EMail:TO EMail:TRIGger EMail:WAVEform Hard Copy Default Values The following table lists the Hardcopy factory default setup values. Command Default Values HARDCopy:FILEName ""...
Page 707 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values HORizontal:MODE:SAMPLERate ≥12.5 GHz instruments: 50 GS/s ≥3.5 GHz and ≤8 GHz instruments: 25.0 GS/s ≤3.5 GHz instruments: 10.0 GS/s HORizontal:ROLL AUTO Mask Default Values The following table lists the Mask factory default setup values. Command Default Values MASK:AUTOAdjust...
Page 708 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle 1.0000E-3 MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth 0.0000 MASK:POLarity POSITIVE MASK:SOUrce MASK:STANdard NONE MASK:STOPOnviolation MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion MASK:TESt:BEEP:FAILure MASK:TESt:DELay 0.0000 MASK:TESt:HARDCopy MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure MASK:TESt:REPeat MASK:TESt:SAMple:THReshold MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName “C:/TekScope/Waveforms/” MASK:TESt:SRQ:COMPLetion MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure MASK:TESt:STATE MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure MASK:TESt:THReshold MASK:TESt:WAVEform MASK:USER:AMPlitude 100.0000E-3 MASK:USER:BITRate 1544000 MASK:USER:HSCAle 200.0000E-9 MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS...
Page 709 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values MATHVAR:VAR<x> 0.0000 MATH<x>:DEFine “ ” MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe “” MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS 1.0000 MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS 1 = 600.0000E-3 2 = 200.0000E-3 3 = -200.0000E-3 4 = -600.0000E-3 MATH<x>:NUMAVg MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER 625.0000E+6 MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS 0.0000 MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6 MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE DEGREES MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel...
Page 710 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod PERCENT MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH 90.0000 MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW 10.0000 MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x> 50.0000 MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x> MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:SIGType PULSE MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe UNDEFINED MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction FORWARDS MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE<x> RISE MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:METHod HISTOGRAM MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:NOISe HIGH MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH 0.0000 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW 0.0000 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x> 0.0000 MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod PERCENT MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH 0.0000 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW 0.0000 MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x>...
Page 711 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Save and Recall Default The following table lists the Save and Recall factory default setup values. Settings Command Default Values RECAll:SETUp:DESKew SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat INTERNAL Search and Mark Default The following table lists the Search and Mark factory default setup values. Values Command Default Values...
Page 712 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Trigger Default Values The following table lists the Trigger factory default setup values. Command Default Values TRIGger:A:COMMunication: AMI = PLUSONE {AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS}:PULSEForm CMI = PLUSONE TRIGger:A:COMMunication: AMI = 0.0000 {AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS}:THReshold:HIGH TRIGger:A:COMMunication: AMI = 0.0000 {AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS}:THReshold:LOW TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate 1544000 TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity...
Page 713 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> CH4 = 1.2000 TRIGger:A:MODe AUTO TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:CLAss GLITCH TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:GLItch:POLarity POSITIVE TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF ACCEPT TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:GLItch:WIDth 2.0000E-9 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:POLarity POSITIVE TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH 1.2000 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW 800.0000E-3 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:WHEn OCCURS TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:WIDth 2.0000E-9 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:SOUrce TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity STAYSHIGH TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe 2.0000E-9 2.0000E-9 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity POSITIVE TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH...
Page 714 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt TRIGger:B:PULse:WINdow:POLarity EITHER TRIGger:B:PULse:WINdow:POLarity:CH<x> EITHER TRIGger:B:STATE TRIGger:B:TIMe 16.0000E-9 TRIGger:B:TYPe EDGE Vertical Default Values The following table lists the Vertical factory default setup values. Command Default Values CH<x>:BANdwidth 500.0000E+6 CH<x>:COUPling CH<x>:DESKew 0.0000 CH<x>:LABel:NAMe “”...
Page 715 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values Command Default Values DATa:DESTination REF1 DATa:ENCdg RIBINARY DATa:SOUrce DATa:STARt DATa:STOP 5000 Zoom Default Values The following table lists the Zoom factory default setup values. Command Default Values ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE ZOOm:MODe ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction STOP ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED Zoom1 ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition 50.0000 Zoom2...
Page 716 Appendix C: Factory Default Setup Values C-14 DPO7000, DPO70000/B and DSA7000/B Series Programmer Manual...
Page 717: Appendix D: Gpib Interface Speciﬁcations
Appendix D: GPIB Interface Speciﬁcations This topic describes details of the GPIB remote interface of the instrument. Normally, you will not need this information to use the instrument, but this information may be useful if you are connecting to controllers with unusual conﬁgurations.
Page 718: Gpib Functions
Appendix D: GPIB Interface Speciﬁcations GPIB Functions The following table lists the interface functions and electrical functions subsets supported by this instrument with brief descriptions of each. Table D-2: Interface Functions Interface Function Subset Meaning Acceptor Handshake The instrument can receive multiline messages across the interface from other devices.
Page 719 Glossary ASCII Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange. Controllers transmit commands to the instrument using ASCII character encoding. Address A 7-bit code that identiﬁes an instrument on the communication bus. The digitizing instrument must have a unique address for the controller to recognize and transmit commands to it.
Page 720 Glossary TEKSecure A Tektronix custom command that initializes both waveform and setup memories. This overwrites any previously stored data. Serial Poll A device on the GPIB bus can request service from the GPIB Controller by asserting the GPIB SRQ line (a Hardware line that is only present on the GPIB communications bus).
Page 721 Index AUXIn:PRObe:TIPtype, 2-97 AUXIn:PRObe:UNIts?, 2-97 ACQuire:INTERPEightbit, 2-75 AUXout?, 2-100 ACQuire:NUMFRAMESACQuired?, 2-79 AUXout:EDGE, 2-100 ACQuire:SAMPlingmode, 2-80 AUXout:SOUrce, 2-100 ACQuire?, 2-75 ACQuire:MODe, 2-76 ACQuire:NUMACq?, 2-77 ACQuire:NUMAVg, 2-78 BELl, 2-101 ACQuire:NUMEnv, 2-78 BUSY?, 2-101 ACQuire:NUMSAMples, 2-80 ACQuire:STATE, 2-81 ACQuire:STOPAfter, 2-82 *CAL?, 2-102 ALIas, 2-82 CALibrate:CALProbe:CH<x>?, 2-103 ALIas:CATalog?, 2-83 CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt, 2-104...
Page 722 Index CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten, 2-126 CURSor:STATE, 2-137 CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten, 2-127 CURSor:VBArs, 2-137 CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits, 2-127 CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?, 2-138 CH<x>:TERmination, 2-129 CURSor:VBArs:UNIts, 2-140 CH<x>?, 2-107 CURSor:WAVEform, 2-140 CH<x>:COUPling, 2-111 CURSor:XY?, 2-143 CH<x>:DESKew, 2-111 CURSor:XY:RATDELta?, 2-145 CH<x>:LABel:NAMe, 2-112 CURSor:XY:RDELta?, 2-146 CH<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-112 CURSor:XY:READOUT, 2-147 CH<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-113 CURSor:XY:THDELta?, 2-148 CH<x>:OFFSet, 2-113 CURSor:XY:XDELta?, 2-149 CH<x>:POSition, 2-114...
Page 723 Index DIAg:RESults?, 2-171 DISplay:INTENSITy?, 2-189 DIAg:SELect:ALL, 2-172 DISplay:PERSistence, 2-191 DIAg:SELect:AREA, 2-173 DISplay:SCREENTExt?, 2-192 DIAg:SELect:LAST, 2-173 DISplay:SHOWREmote, 2-197 DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS, 2-174 DISplay:STYle, 2-198 DIAg:SELect:TEST, 2-175 DISplay:TRIGBar, 2-198 DIAg:STATE, 2-175 DISplay:TRIGT, 2-199 DIAg:STOP, 2-176 DISplay:VARpersist, 2-200 DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr, 2-178 DISplay:WAVEform, 2-200 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView, 2-179 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView, 2-180 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr, 2-180 EMail, 2-201 DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CARet, 2-181...
Page 724 Index FASTAcq:STATE, 2-218 HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:CH<x>, 2-245 FILESystem:WRITEFile, 2-224 HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED: FILESystem?, 2-218 MATH<x>, 2-245 FILESystem:COPy, 2-219 HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:REF<x>, 2-245 FILESystem:CWD, 2-219 HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:SOUrce, 2-246 FILESystem:DELEte, 2-220 HORizontal:FASTframe:SEQuence, 2-247 FILESystem:DIR?, 2-220 HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE, 2-247 FILESystem:MKDir, 2-221 HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame, 2-248 FILESystem:PRInt, 2-221 HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL: FILESystem:READFile, 2-222 <wfm>?, 2-248 FILESystem:REName, 2-223 HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen: FILESystem:RMDir, 2-224 <wfm>?, 2-249...
Page 725 Index HORizontal:MAIn?, 2-256 MARK:FREE?, 2-281 HORizontal:MODE, 2-260 MARK:SELected:END?, 2-282 HORizontal:ROLL, 2-263 MARK:SELected:LABel, 2-282 MARK:SELected:STATe, 2-284 MARK:TOTal?, 2-285 MASK:AUTOAdjust:HDELTA, 2-287 ID?, 2-264 MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA, 2-287 *IDN?, 2-264 MASK:AUTOSet:AUTOAdjust, 2-288 MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj, 2-290 MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard, 2-291 MASK:AUTOSet:TRIGger, 2-297 LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>, 2-266 MASK:AUTOSet:USER:ONE, 2-297 LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>, 2-267 MASK:AUTOSet:USER:TYPe, 2-298 LIMit:COMpare:REF<x>, 2-267 MASK:AUTOSet:USER:ZERo, 2-298 LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits:RESet, 2-270...
Page 726 Index MASK:AUTOSet:HSCAle, 2-289 MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS, 2-349 MASK:AUTOSet:MODe, 2-290 MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS, 2-349 MASK:AUTOSet:VPOS, 2-299 MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER, 2-351 MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle, 2-299 MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS, 2-351 MASK:COPy:USER, 2-300 MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH, 2-352 MASK:COUNt, 2-300 MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk, 2-353 MASK:COUNt:HITS?, 2-301 MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG, 2-354 MASK:COUNt:STATE, 2-302 MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE, 2-354 MASK:COUNt:TESTS?, 2-302 MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel, 2-355 MASK:COUNt:TOTal?, 2-303 MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset, 2-355 MASK:DISplay, 2-304 MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw, 2-356 MASK:FILTer, 2-305...
Page 727 Index MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent: MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID<x>, 2-404 HIGH, 2-374 MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, 2-405 MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH, 2-406 LOW, 2-375 MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW, 2-406 MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent: MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID<x>, 2-407 MID<x>, 2-376 MEASUrement:SOUrce<x>:SIGType, 2-408 MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel?, 2-371 MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt, 2-409 MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>, 2-376 MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe, 2-409 MEASUrement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:SIGType, 2-377 MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting, 2-410 MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, 2-378 MEASUrement?, 2-363 MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?, 2-382 MEASUrement:GATing, 2-366 MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?, 2-383 MEASUrement:IMMed?, 2-367...
Page 728 Index SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory: STANdard, 2-441 *SAV, 2-425 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory: SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, 2-427 STROBEsource, 2-441 SAVe:MASK, 2-425 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe: SAVe:SETUp, 2-426 CH<x>, 2-442 SAVe:WAVEform, 2-427 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe: *SDS, 2-429 MATH<x>, 2-443 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:COPy, 2-430 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:STATE, 2-430 REF<x>, 2-443 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TOTAL?, 2-431 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:EDGE: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory: SOUrce, 2-444 AUTOBitrate, 2-431 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:GLItch: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:DDRMemory: POLarity:CH<x>, 2-444...
Page 729 Index SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PATtern:WHEn: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:SETHold: MORELimit, 2-454 SETTime, 2-467 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:PULse: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE:CLOCk: SOUrce, 2-454 EDGE, 2-467 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE:CLOCk: POLarity:CH<x>, 2-455 SOUrce, 2-468 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:STATE: POLarity:MATH<x>, 2-456 WHEn, 2-468 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: POLarity:REF<x>, 2-456 POLarity:CH<x>, 2-469 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: THReshold:HIGH:CH<x>, 2-457 POLarity:MATH<x>, 2-469 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut: THReshold:HIGH:MATH<x>, 2-457 POLarity:REF<x>, 2-470 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:RUNT: SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:TIMEOut:...
Page 730 Index SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WIDth: TRIGger:{A|B}:EDGE:SOUrce, 2-501 POLarity:REF<x>, 2-481 TRIGger:{A|B}:LEVel:CH<x>, 2-502 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WIDth: TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:CLAss, 2-503 WHEn, 2-481 TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:FUNCtion, 2-503 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>, 2-505 EVENT, 2-482 TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:INPut?, 2-504 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH<x>, 2-506 THReshold:HIGH:CH<x>, 2-483 TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn, 2-507 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn: THReshold:HIGH:MATH<x>, 2-483 LESSLimit, 2-507 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn: THReshold:HIGH:REF<x>, 2-484 MORELimit, 2-508 SEARCH:SEARCH<x>:TRIGger:A:WINdow: TRIGger:{A|B}:LOGIc:PATtern?, 2-505 THReshold:LOW:CH<x>, 2-484...
Page 731 Index TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:POLarity, 2-526 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:THReshold: TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:POLarity: BOTh, 2-548 CH<x>, 2-527 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:THReshold: TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:QUAlify, 2-528 HIGH, 2-548 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold: TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:THReshold: BOTh, 2-529 LOW, 2-549 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold: TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:THReshold?, 2-547 HIGH, 2-529 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH, 2-549 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold: TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:WINdow?, 2-545 LOW, 2-530 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse?, 2-520 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?, 2-528 TRIGger:{A|B}:UPPerthreshold:CH<x>, 2-550 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:WHEn, 2-530 TRIGger:A:CAN:CONDition, 2-552 TRIGger:{A|B}:PULse:RUNT:WIDth, 2-531 TRIGger:A:CAN:DATa:DIRection, 2-552...
Page 732 Index TRIGger:A:I2C:CONDition, 2-570 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:LINEPeriod, 2-601 TRIGger:A:I2C:DATa:DIRection, 2-571 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SYNCInterval, 2-601 TRIGger:A:I2C:DATa:LEVel, 2-572 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?, 2-600 TRIGger:A:I2C:DATa:SOUrce, 2-572 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD, 2-602 TRIGger:A:I2C:DATa:STARt, 2-573 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD, 2-602 TRIGger:A:I2C:DATa:VALue, 2-573 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE, 2-603 TRIGger:A:I2C:FORMat, 2-573 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity, 2-604 TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:POLarity, 2-575 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN, 2-604 TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:POLarity:CH<x>, 2-576 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce, 2-605 TRIGger:A:RS232:BAUd, 2-576 TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard, 2-606 TRIGger:A:RS232:DATa:LEVel, 2-577 TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt, 2-609 TRIGger:A:RS232:DATa:SOUrce, 2-577...
Page 733 Index TRIGger:ENHanced, 2-617 WFMOutpre:PT_Off?, 2-643 TRIGger:MULTiscope, 2-618 WFMOutpre:PT_ORder?, 2-644 TRIGger:SENSITivity, 2-623 WFMOutpre:WFId?, 2-644 TRIGger:STATE?, 2-623 WFMOutpre:XINcr?, 2-645 *TST?, 2-624 WFMOutpre:XUNit?, 2-646 WFMOutpre:XZEro?, 2-646 WFMOutpre:YMUlt?, 2-647 WFMOutpre:YOFf?, 2-647 UNLock, 2-624 WFMOutpre:YUNit?, 2-648 WFMOutpre:YZEro?, 2-648 VERBose, 2-625 ZOOm, 2-649 ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition, 2-650 ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle, 2-650 *WAI, 2-626 ZOOm:MATH<x>:HORizontal:POSition, 2-651 WAVFrm?, 2-626...

This manual is also suitable for:

Dpo70000/b series Dpo7000 series

Tektronix DSA70000/B Series Programmer's Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for Tektronix DSA70000/B Series

Summary of Contents for Tektronix DSA70000/B Series

This manual is also suitable for:

Table of Contents